JP2020114463A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of optimizing constitution of transmission information transmitted from one control means to another control means in order to execute a performance.SOLUTION: A sound light side MPU 62 transmits a command to a display CPU 72, to thereby instruct execution of a performance. The command comprises first command data, second command data and third command data, and the display CPU 72 grasps a content of the performance instructed from the sound light side MPU 62 according to these command data. In this case, when instructing execution of one performance, the sound light side MPU 62 transmits the command comprising the first to the third command data, in correspondence with each of performance contents in a second stage included in the one performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a command transmitted from one control means is used to execute control corresponding to the command by another control means.

For example, in a pachinko machine, a configuration in which execution control of production is performed by the control means for production based on a command transmitted from the main control means for controlling the progress of the game, or transmitted from the control means for one production A configuration is known in which execution control of performance is performed by another control means for performance based on the command (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-153690, A

Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to optimize the configuration of the transmission information transmitted from one control means to another control means in order to execute the effect, and this point has not yet been achieved. There is room for improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and can optimize the configuration of transmission information transmitted from one control unit to another control unit in order to execute an effect. It is intended to provide a game machine.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a first control means for deciding the execution content of the effect,
Second control means for controlling the effect execution means based on the transmission information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
When the predetermined execution trigger has occurred, the performance corresponding to the trigger is executed in the effect executing means,
The trigger corresponding effect has a plurality of effect elements in which the change target content that is at least one of the presence or absence of execution and the content changes,
It is a configuration in which the execution pattern of the trigger corresponding effect is different depending on the combination pattern of the content of the variation target for the plurality of effect elements,
The first control means, when transmitting the transmission information for executing the trigger corresponding effect, displays the corresponding transmission information corresponding to the change target content of a predetermined effect element and the change target content of another effect element. It is characterized in that it is provided with an information transmitting means for discriminating and transmitting the corresponding corresponding transmission information.

According to the present invention, it is possible to optimize the configuration of transmission information transmitted from one control unit to another control unit in order to execute an effect.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of (a)-(j) symbol display device. (A), (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents on the display surface of the symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows main side command corresponding processing performed by a sound-light side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the command transmitted to the display CPU72 from MPU (a)-(c). It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents instructed by each command data. It is a flowchart which shows the command selection process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing performed by a display CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed by a display CPU, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a command storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding process performed by a display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a reference table. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command corresponding process performed by the sound-light side MPU. 6 is a time chart showing how pointer information of an execution target table is adjusted in relation to task processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(c) drawing list. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(c) color change production. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the memory module for performing a color change production, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a color palette. It is a flow chart which shows the arithmetic processing for color change production performed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart showing a setting process for a color change effect executed by VDP. It is a flowchart showing a writing process for color change effect executed in VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(e) effect production. It is the flowchart which shows the calculation processing for the effect production which is executed with the indicatory CPU. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for the effect production which is executed with VDP. It is the flowchart which shows the writing processing for the effect production which is executed with VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(e) development production. It is a time chart which shows a mode that development effect is performed using each image data for effects. It is a flow chart which shows arithmetic processing for development production performed by a display CPU. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for development production which is executed with VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating simultaneous display effect, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing simultaneous display effect, and (c) displays the effect image for increase. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining image data for. 9 is a time chart showing how normal effect image data and simple effect image data are selectively used as image data for displaying an effect image for increase. It is a flow chart which shows a calculation processing for simultaneous display production performed by a display CPU. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for simultaneous indicatory production which is executed with VDP. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by a display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(c) drawing list. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by VDP. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a situation in which drawing data is created in accordance with execution of drawing processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) loop production. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing a loop production, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a combination table. It is a time chart showing how the loop effect is executed. It is a flow chart which shows the calculation processing for loop productions performed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for interpolation display periods performed by a display CPU. It is a time chart which shows the timing when the derivation of the coordinate data by the combination is started for the A character for loop effect and the B character for loop effect. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for loop production which is executed with VDP. It is an explanatory view for explaining a table for first start target determination. It is a flowchart which shows the process for interpolation display periods performed by a display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a), (b) bone model display. It is an explanatory view for explaining data composition for displaying a bone model. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining skeleton data, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a coordinate calculation area. It is a flow chart which shows the calculation processing for bone model display production performed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the coordinate calculation process performed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for bone model display effects performed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) collective character group. It is an explanatory view for explaining skeleton data of each set unit character. It is explanatory drawing for comparing each data amount of the (a)-(c) bone display character and the set unit character. It is an explanatory view for explaining bone animation data for a set. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the action content of each set unit character. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a), (b) plane shadow display. It is an explanatory view for explaining a data structure required for performing plane shadow display. It is a flow chart which shows a calculation processing for plane shadow display performed by a display CPU. 8 is a flowchart showing a setting process for plane shadow display executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of another form of (a), (b) plane shadow display. It is a flow chart which shows a calculation processing for plane shadow display performed by a display CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of step shadow display, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure required in order to perform step shadow display. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for displaying a step shadow performed by a display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a setting process for displaying a step shadow performed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the variable display production, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the area utilized at the time of execution of variable display production in the expansion buffer of VRAM. It is a flow chart which shows the calculation processing for change display production performed by the display CPU. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for fluctuation indicatory production which is executed with VDP. It is the flowchart which shows the drawing data formation processing for fluctuation indicatory production which is executed with VDP. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing data of the symbol display part preserve|saved at each storage buffer. (A)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the drawing data of the image for variable display effects are produced using the drawing data preserve|saved at each storage buffer. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a), (b) distortion background display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data for performing (a)-(c) distortion background display. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for displaying a distorted background, which is executed by the display CPU. 8 is a flowchart showing a setting process for displaying a distorted background, which is executed by VDP. It is a flow chart which shows refraction application processing performed by VDP.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. .. The gaming machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side in front view.

In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the means. The guide rail as is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided by guide rails to the upper part of the game area PA. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by manually operating the launching operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, etc. are provided in each opening. ing.

Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 occur, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Regarding the number of prize balls, specifically, when a ball enters the first operation port 33 or a ball enters the second operation port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , When 10 balls are paid to the general winning opening 31, 15 prize balls are paid out, and when 15 balls are paid to the special electric prize winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. To be executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls may be smaller in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning openings are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, the both operating ports 33, 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the universal electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the universal electric object 34a is in the open state, the prize can enter the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operation port 34 in the downflow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through-gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a public figure display of a public figure unit 38 provided in a lower right corner of the game area PA where a game ball does not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power combination opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal graphic display portion 38a is ended, the operation shifts to the universal electric open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The universal figure display section 38a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device is provided. , Other types of display devices such as CRTs or dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the universal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the universal figure unit 38, a universal figure hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal figure display section 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the through gate 35 is four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the universal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special drawing unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display portion 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display portion 37a, a winning or lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating opening 33 or the winning of the second operating opening 34 as a trigger, whereby a variable display or a predetermined display of the design is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display portion 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , Other types of display devices such as CRTs or dot matrix displays. As the picture displayed on the special figure display portion 37a, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors are displayed. A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure pending display portion 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed on the special symbol display portion 37a based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed in accordance with the variable display. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. That is, when the variable display is performed on the special figure display portion 37a, the variable display is also performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in the game times when the game result is a big hit result, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line set in advance in the symbol display device 41.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing individually the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display surface P of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 3(a) to 3(j), the design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached and a shell-shaped design. It is composed of sub-patterns. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by adding numbers "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, as a plurality of display areas, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper stage, the middle stage and the lower stage are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, 9 types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are stopped and displayed. It is like this. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display surface P. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number on any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) were assigned. The main symbol corresponds to the "non-specific symbol". When the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same specific symbols or the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and thereafter, An explicit video is displayed.

The mode of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

Further, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. Corresponds to one game game.

Returning to the description of FIG. 2, when a big hit is won in a winning lottery based on a winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, it is possible to win the special electric prize winning device 32. Switch to open/close execution mode. The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a big winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The open/close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and when the game is transferred to the open/close execution mode in the internal lottery, the game balls can be switched to an open state in which prizes can be won. It has become. By the way, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that in the closed state, the winning is not impossible, but the winning state may be less likely to occur than in the opened state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 having the above configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PA is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 43. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window 42. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 45 for outputting a sound effect according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 42, an upper bulge portion 46 and a lower bulge portion 47 that bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging part 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 47a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 46a.

A main controller, a sound emission controller, and a display controller are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism section including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power supply/launch control device. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main controller 50, a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening is provided to the substrate box that houses the main control substrate 51 or the like, or a trace structure for leaving the trace of the opening is provided. You may As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies that form the substrate box are inseparably joined and a structure of a joint portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, or a peeling-off pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is an object to be adhered. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left in the case is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is conceivable that an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box.

An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

As the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and that does not require external power supply for storage is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control/calculation unit, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be included as separate chips. It may be installed.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The power supply/fire control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply/launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51, but also to other devices such as a payout control device 55 and a display control device 70 described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply/launch control device 57. In this case, the power failure monitoring board monitors the occurrence of the power failure, and when the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed, the power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes the processing for the power failure. It becomes possible to do.

Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, the detection is provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning-corresponding ball portion such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 makes a prize determination (ball determination) to each ball receiving portion. In addition, the MPU 52 executes the jackpot occurrence lottery and the jackpot result type lottery based on the winning of the first operating mouth 33 and the second operating mouth 34, and also executes the reach generating lottery and the display duration determination lottery for each game time. To do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 uses various kinds of counter information at the time of playing a game, and performs jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special symbol display portion 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the general symbol display portion 38a, and the like. As shown in FIG. 6, specifically, a random number counter C1 used for jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining jackpot types such as a probability variation jackpot result and a regular jackpot result, and a symbol. In the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time is used. Further, the general electric utility article release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not to put the general electric utility article 34a in the second operation port 34 into the electric utility state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 54b as an acquisition information storage unit when a prize is paid to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. Stored in.

The hold storage area 54b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and the winning history of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 is recorded. In addition, the numerical information of each of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

In the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winning in the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE2 Numerical value information is stored in time series in the order of →third holding area RE3→fourth holding area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. .. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display portion 37a, and at the start of one game time. Is judged on the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

For details of each counter, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to "0". In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a win/loss table. As the win/loss table, a win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the win/loss lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that is a big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/loss table is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers that is a big win is 20. If the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electric accessory 34a of the 2 working port 34.

As a mode of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the special winning opening is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds have passed or the special winning opening is won. It is continued until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the big winning opening is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec has passed or the number of winnings to the big winning opening. Will be continued until there are six.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is being operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 58 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 sec. It On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening and the opening limit number for one opening are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode. Also, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is high. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the special electricity winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, for one opening, the product of the game cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time, while in the low frequency winning mode, The product of the game cycle of the game ball and the release limit number may be set longer than the release limit time. In addition, even if the interval between shooting game balls and the opening time of one big winning opening is not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former, so that Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no prize is won in the special electric prize winning device 32.

As a support mode of the second working port 34 in the universal electric object 34a, when comparing in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in the same manner with respect to the game area, The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the accessory 34a being opened per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of being in the electric-role open state winning in the electric-role auditors open lottery using the general-use auditors open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). ), the high frequency support mode sets the number of times that the general electric officer 34a is in the open state when it is elected to open the electric role more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The opening time of is set to be long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric power combination open state is elected and the general electric utility object 34a is opened a plurality of times, from the time when one open state ends to the time when the next open state starts. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode is shorter than the low-frequency support mode in that the minimum secured time required for performing the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is shorter. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operation port 33 is higher than in the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than the first operation port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a winning is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he or she holds. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of being in the electric power open state per unit time in the high frequency support mode is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be configured such that the probability of winning the electric role open state in is increased. In addition, a secured time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (for example, on the public figure display portion 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time to be executed) are prepared, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter securing time can be selected more easily or the average securing time is set shorter than in the low frequency supporting mode. May be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (that is, , Shortening the one-time fluctuation display time in the public figure display portion 38a), shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, apply any one condition or a condition of any combination. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result, and a 15R certainty variation jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the normal jackpot state.

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. .. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the win/loss lottery becomes a big hit state win, and the big hit state is brought about. In other words, the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot state.

The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the win/loss lottery becomes a big hit state win, and the big hit state is brought about. In other words, the 15R certainty variation jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the game state to the 15R certainty variation jackpot state.

Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means a state in which the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” correspond to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” correspond to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the manner of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing two kinds of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result is the highest in the high-frequency winning mode in the opening/closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode. In the support mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, it is the high-frequency support mode. As a result, the monotony of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

As a kind of probability variation jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode is maintained to the previous mode. The implicit 2R probability variable jackpot results that would otherwise be included may be included. In this case, the probability variation jackpot result is further diversified.

Furthermore, as a kind of the miss result in the win/loss lottery, a special miss result which does not occur in the win/win lottery mode and the support mode after the transition to the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode may be included. .. In the configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability variable jackpot result and the special outlier result are set as described above, the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained to the previous mode. It is common to be done, but because the transition mode of the win/loss lottery mode is different, for example, when one of the implicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result or the special outlier result occurs in the normal gaming state, It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and then returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and the stop display result after variable display is specially displayed in the game times in which the opening/closing execution mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the high frequency winning mode. In the resulting gaming machine, at the stage before the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 is started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, the player is made to think that the special display result is likely to be the variable display state. Is a display state for.

Two types of expected effects are set: the above-mentioned reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the special display result before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, so that a combination of the jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode. A combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, a display state in which variable display of symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol columns is included. Further, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, , A combination of reach patterns is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a reach effect is included by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P.

Regarding the reach display related to the variable display of the symbols, specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbols, a high-frequency winning mode is generated on a preset effective line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. The reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the combination of reach symbols in which the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to can be established, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variable display of symbols by the final stop symbol sequence Is to do.

Explaining the display contents of FIG. 4 in detail, first, in the state where the variable display of the symbols is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and the variable display of the symbols is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, one of the valid A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the variable display of symbols is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display will be given. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of symbols is ended.

In the notice display, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, or in a part of the symbol columns. In a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, a background image having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and a pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes are also included. Such advance notice display can occur at both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time when the game is switched to the open/close execution mode. Further, in the game times that do not shift to the open/close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing refers to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53 and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not in the main controller 50 but in the sound emission controller 60.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in determining the variation display time in the special figure display portion 37a and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 in the MPU 52. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process described later. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 37a and determining the variation pattern at the time when the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

The general electric utility article release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The universal electric material release counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the electric power holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric outlet 34a to be in the open state based on the stored value of the general electric outlet opening counter C4.

On the output side of the MPU 52, a payout control device 55 is connected, and a power supply/launch control device 57 is connected. To the payout control device 55, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted based on the result of the winning determination to the winning corresponding winning portion. The payout control device 55 causes the payout device 56 to perform payout control of prize balls and loan balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A firing permission command is transmitted to the power/firing control device 57 based on the fact that the firing operation device 28 is being operated. The power supply/launch control device 57 drives the game ball launching mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

Moreover, the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of these special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 52 at each game time. Further, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the MPU 52 executes the display control of the general figure display unit 38a.

To the output side of the MPU 52, a special electric prize driving unit that opens and closes the opening and closing door of the special electric prize device 32, and a general electric member driving unit that opens and closes the general electric member 34a of the second operating port 34 are connected. .. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 52 executes the drive control of the special electric winning drive unit so that the special winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electric utility object 34a is elected in the open state, the MPU 52 performs drive control of the general electric object driving unit so that the general electric object 34a is opened and closed. Further, the sound emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various production commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processing of the MPU 52 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses without waiting for the next process. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 57 is manually operated, and in subsequent step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 54. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In the following step S107, it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored and held data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. Then, it progresses to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch is not pressed, on condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, the process of step S108 is not executed and step S109 is executed. Proceed to. In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 in order to recognize the current game state. To do.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S111, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and at the same time, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 54, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec cycle). First, in step S201, a power failure information storage process is executed. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In subsequent step S202, lottery random number update processing is executed. In the lottery random number updating process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility article release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical value information is sequentially read from the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility article opening counter C4, and the read numerical value information is incremented by 1 respectively. After that, a process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In a succeeding step S205, a fraud detecting process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the RAM 54.

In a succeeding step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing of step S207 and thereafter is executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the special electric prize winning drive unit is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set, the information is set. Stop the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the universal utility product 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the information for starting the output of the drive signal to the universal utility product drive unit and switching to the closed state. If is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

In a succeeding step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the respective winning detection sensors are read, and whether or not there is a winning in the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, the second working opening 34, and the through gate 35. Executes the process to specify.

In a succeeding step S210, a timer updating process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54 is executed. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical value information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may be configured.

In a succeeding step S211, a shooting control process for controlling the shooting of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, as described above, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec.

In a succeeding step S212, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208.

In a succeeding step S213, special figure special electric power control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric power control process, when a prize is generated in the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 in a situation where the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, A process of sequentially storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in the pending storage area 54b is executed. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot win, provided that the hold information is not stored during the game turn and the opening/closing execution mode and the hold information is stored. If it corresponds to the processing and the jackpot winning, the jackpot determination processing for determining which jackpot result the holding information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric power control process, not only the win/loss determination process and the distribution determination process, but if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot win, whether or not the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence The reach determination process for determination is executed, and the process for selecting the duration of the game time is executed by using the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the big hit, the big hit type, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence is read from the ROM 53, and the read variable display time table and the numerical information of the change type counter CS at that timing Determine the duration of the game. Then, the variation command including the information of the determined game time duration and the type command including the information of the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and the variation display of the pattern on the special figure display portion 37a is performed. To start. As a result, one game time is started, and the effect for game time is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41.

Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game time during the execution of one game time, and if it is the end timing, the display corresponding to the game result is displayed. , Executes a process for ending the game time. In this case, a final stop command indicating that the game time should be ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric power control process, when the result of the game time is a result corresponding to the shift to the open/close execution mode, a process for starting the open/close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an opening command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a closing command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. In addition, in the special figure special electric power control process, when ending the opening/closing execution mode, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode are set. Execute the process.

After executing the special figure special electric power control processing of step S213 in the timer interruption processing, the general figure normal electric power control processing is executed in step S214. In the general/universal/universal control process, a process is executed to obtain the general/universal-side pending information when a prize has been paid to the through gate 35, and the general/universal-side pending information is stored. Then, the release information is determined to be released, and the processing for performing the effect for the general figure is executed when the release determination is triggered. In addition, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the universal electric accessory 34a of the second working port 34 is executed.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the special figure display section 37a on the special figure hold display section 37b is set and The output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the universal figure display section 38a on the universal figure hold display section 38b is set. In step S215, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display portion 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display content of the general figure display portion 38a is changed. Set the output information for updating.

In a succeeding step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, payout output processing for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In a succeeding step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and the end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. After that, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Voice emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

The sound emission control device 60, as shown in FIG. 5, includes a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in.

As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control/calculation unit, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 50 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and the display light emitting section 44 and the speaker section 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. A display CPU 72, which will be described later, of the display control device 70 is connected to both the input side and the output side of the MPU 62. That is, the MPU 62 is connected to the display CPU 72 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and commands are exchanged between the MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 by bidirectional communication. Although the bidirectional communication is performed by serial communication, the bidirectional communication is not limited to this and may be performed by parallel communication.

The MPU 62 receives the variation command transmitted from the main control device 50, recognizes that it is necessary to start the game game effect, and executes the game game effect start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the game use effect, and executes the game use effect ending process. In addition, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that the jackpot effect needs to be started or progressed, and the jackpot effect processing is executed.

Note that receiving a command from the main control device 50 in the MPU 62 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 50, and includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received.

In the game time production start process, based on both the variation command and the type command, the variation display time grasping process for grasping the variation display time of the corresponding game time, and the reach display grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the reach display And a jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and a jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs. Also, based on the grasp result in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, a symbol for determining the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 in this game time. Execute the type recognition process. Then, based on the result of each grasping process, a variation pattern command including information on the variable display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designating command including information on the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed, the display control device. 70.

In addition, in the game reproduction effect start process, in addition to the above-described grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for performing a notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type of lottery for the notice display is also executed. Then, if the advance notice display has been won, the advance notice command including the information about the type of the advance notice display is transmitted to the display control device 70.

Further, in the game round effect start process, the display light emitting table for game round and the voice table for game round are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing result of each of the above processes. The display light emission table for game times defines the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 in the course of progress of the corresponding game time. In addition, the voice table for game times defines the output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the course of progress of the corresponding game times.

In the game game effect ending process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the voice output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game time are ended. In addition, in the game turning effect ending process, an end command including information for ending the game turning effect is transmitted to the display control device 70.

In the jackpot performance process, based on the received various commands for jackpot performance, grasp the production mode at the time of opening, each round, between each round, and ending, etc., and perform the jackpot performance corresponding to the grasped result. Is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for the big hit effect and the sound table for the big hit effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the big hit effect. Stipulate.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 via the input port 77. To be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice light emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice light emission control device 60, and includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay substrate is received. Be done.

The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via the bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60, issues a drawing instruction to cause the symbol display device 41 to output an image signal. The memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described below.

The memory module 74 prestores control data including control programs and fixed value data, and also includes sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, background data, and moving image data. It is a storage unit that stores various image data in advance. The memory module 74 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outer shape and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. Further, the background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described later in detail.

The work RAM 73 is a storage unit for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 74 and transferred, and also temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in particular, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. The work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred to the work RAM 73 from the memory module 74 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. Further, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

The VRAM 75 includes a development buffer 81, and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be incorporated in the VDP 76.

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 76 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 76 should be called a microcomputer chip containing a drawing-specific firmware.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving picture decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72 and the I/F 96 for the VRAM 75.

In the VDP 76, the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 is stored in the register 92. By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. It should be noted that all of the control programs for operating the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the control unit 91, and the control program and the contents of the drawing list are stored. Alternatively, the control unit 91 may execute a predetermined process. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 74.

As the above processing, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or by processing) the image data read to the expansion buffer 81. The drawing data for one frame means the data necessary for displaying the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of the frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The storage capacity is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, in the situation where drawing on the symbol display device 41 is being executed using drawing data created in one frame area. The drawing data to be used in the future is created for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is displayed in the display circuit 94. It is output to the symbol display device 41 through the connected output port 78. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 82a and 82b to the display circuit 94. The transferred drawing data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 41 and converted into gradation data. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal. Further, the moving picture decoder 93 executes decoding of the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

<Processing Configuration of MPU 62 of Audio Light Emission Control Device 60>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 62 of the sound emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound-light side MPU 62) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed by the sound-light side MPU 62 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

First, in step S301, a main command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 (hereinafter referred to as the main MPU 52) is executed. In a succeeding step S302, a command selection process for instructing the display CPU 72 about the content of the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed.

Then, in step S303, the light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed according to the control pattern table read in the main command corresponding process in step S301. Further, in step S304, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed according to the control pattern table read in the main command corresponding process in step S301. After that, the pointer update processing is executed in step S305. In the pointer updating process, the pointer information of the current control pattern table is updated to the next pointer information. Further, in step S306, display side command corresponding processing for executing processing corresponding to the command received from the display CPU 72 is executed.

<Main command response processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main command corresponding process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, information indicating which is the result of the winning/disapproving lottery or the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game is specified. The specified information is written in the RAM 64.

In a succeeding step S403, advance notice lottery processing is executed. In the advance notice lottery processing, it is decided by a lottery whether or not to perform advance notice display on the symbol display device 41 at the current game time. As the notice display, as described above, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the variable display of the symbols is started on the symbol display device 41, or a part of the symbols is displayed. In a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns in the symbol column, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and a background screen up to that mode Include those having different predetermined modes, and those having the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as predetermined modes different from the previous modes. The notice display can occur at both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability. Further, in the notice lottery process, the notice times are more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the out-of-range results, and further, notice images having a lower appearance rate are more likely to occur. To carry out a preliminary lottery.

In a succeeding step S404, a stop symbol determination process is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. The determined information is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected for the 15R certainty variation jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R certainty variation jackpot result. The effective lines L1 to L5 on which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, the same combination of odd symbols may be selected even if the result is usually a big hit.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is an explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1. The information corresponding to the stop result for which a specific symbol combination (“3.4.1”) is established on L5 is determined as the current stop result information. In this case, the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination processing, if the game result of this game time is a deviation result, the presence or absence of the reach display is specified from the content of the command for variation. Then, when the reach display occurs, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols are not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and one or two activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination of reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach display does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and the reach is reached on all the activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is not established is determined as the information of the present stop result.

In a succeeding step S405, processing for determining the effect pattern of this game time is executed. In this process, the information on the duration of the game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, the information on the duration, the information on the game result specified in step S402, the advance notice in step S403. An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the lottery process and the stop result information determined in step S404 is selected. At the time of selecting this effect pattern, the pattern determination table provided in the ROM 63 is referred to, and information on the continuation time this time, information on the game result, information on the lottery result of the advance notice lottery process, and the stop result are displayed. The address in the ROM 63 of the control pattern table corresponding to the information is specified, and the control pattern table is read from the ROM 63 and written in the RAM 64 based on the result of specifying the address.

The control pattern table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 11 is an example of a control pattern table that can be selected when a 15R certainty variation jackpot result is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 11, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the duration of the target game time is set in the control pattern table, and information on the content of the task is associated with each pointer information, Information about the presence or absence of command output and information about additional data are set.

The information of the content of the task is the information that is set to perform the light emission control and the sound output control corresponding to the current game time, and the information that does not reflect the information of the content of the task is not set as additional data. As long as it is possible, in each frame, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed in a manner according to the information of the task content.

Regarding the control pattern table shown in FIG. 11, specifically, the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the pointer information of “0”, and the data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of “200”. The data at the end of notice production is set in the pointer information of "300", the data at the start of normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and the data at the start of super reach is set in the pointer information of "700". The data is set, the data at the start of the finalized effect is set in the pointer information of “1000”, and the data at the end of the change is set in the pointer information of “1400”. Each of these pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between break timings is set.

The information regarding the presence/absence of command output is information indicating the presence/absence of command output from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. By outputting a command to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table, it is possible to associate the image content on the symbol display device 41, the light emission content on the display light emitting unit 44, and the sound output content on the speaker unit 45. .. That is, according to the content of the moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 44 performs the light effect and the speaker unit 45 performs the sound output effect.

In the control pattern table shown in FIG. 11, specifically, command data is set for pointer information “0” in which data at the start of fluctuation is set in the task content. Therefore, at the start of the variation of the game times, the display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. Further, in the content of the task, each pointer information that is set to the data at the start of the notice production, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the final production and the data at the end of the fluctuation Specifically, command data is set for each pointer information of "200", "400", "700", "1000", "1400". Therefore, within the range of the effect for game use that is started by the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger that the command for change and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 52, the effect classification of the effect category included in the effect for game use When the type changes, the display control corresponding to the new effect classification is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72.

The information of the additional data is set as blank as the initial setting of the control pattern table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when there is an instruction to execute the notification. When the additional data is written, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content. For example, if additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image is set as a notification, the image is displayed so that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. It

It should be noted that the control pattern table is provided corresponding to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the effect in a situation where neither the effect for the game turning nor the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in addition to the effect for the game turning. Has been. Since the control pattern table is set corresponding to various situations in this manner, some control pattern table is read into the RAM 64 in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the sound-light side MPU 62. There is.

Returning to the explanation of the main command handling process (FIG. 10), it is determined in step S406 whether or not the notification execution command is received from the main MPU 52. When the notification execution command specifies that a predetermined event set as an unauthorized monitoring target has occurred in the fraud detection process of step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of the main MPU 52. It is also output when the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state in the input state monitoring processing in step S212. Since the notification execution command includes data corresponding to the content of the notification target, the sound-light side MPU 62 can specify the content of the notification target from the received notification execution command.

When the notification execution command is received (step S406: YES), the setting process for notification start is executed (step S407). In the setting process for the notification start, the data for executing the notification corresponding to the notification execution command of this time is set to the additional data after the current pointer information in the currently set control pattern table. For example, when the notification execution command corresponding to the detection of the injustice is received, the data for performing the injustice notification by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is set as the additional data. Further, when the notification execution command corresponding to the state change of the pachinko machine 10 such as opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is received, the data for performing the state notification by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is added data. Set as. As a result, the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 execute the injustice notification or the status notification. If the control pattern table to be executed is changed after receiving the notification execution command and before receiving the notification cancellation command, the additional data of the newly changed control pattern table is The notification data having the same content as the content set in the additional data of the control pattern table immediately before is set. Thereby, it becomes possible to continue the execution of the notification.

Then, in step S408, the notification execution command corresponding to the content of the notification execution command received this time is transmitted to the display CPU 72. As a result, the display CPU 72 executes the display control so that the notification image corresponding to the notification execution command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In step S409, it is determined whether or not the notification cancel command is received from the main MPU 52. The notification cancel command is output when the fraud detection process of step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of the main MPU 52 specifies that the state in which the predetermined event has occurred is cancelled. In the input state monitoring process of step S212, the output is also made when it is specified that the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is closed from the open state.

When the notification cancellation command is received (step S409: YES), the notification cancellation setting process is executed (step S410). In the notification cancellation setting process, additional data after the current pointer information in the currently set control pattern table is cleared to "0". As a result, the injustice notification or the status notification executed by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is canceled. Then, in step S411, a notification cancel command is transmitted to the display CPU 72. As a result, the display of the notification image on the symbol display device 41 ends.

In the main command handling process, in addition to the processes described above, other handling processes are executed in step S412. In the other corresponding processing, for example, when the final stop command is received from the main MPU 52, processing for ending the effect for game use is executed. Also, when the opening command is received from the main MPU 52, the control pattern table for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is read, and when the ending command is received from the main MPU 52, the opening/closing execution mode is used. The process for ending the effect of is executed. Further, in a situation where neither the game turning effect nor the opening/closing execution mode effect is executed, the control pattern table for executing the waiting effect is read.

<Command selection processing>
Next, the command selection process executed in step S302 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. Prior to description of the command selection processing, the content of the command transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the command.

The command transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 has a data structure of a plurality of bytes. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, it has first command data CD1, second command data CD2, and third command data CD3. The first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 have the same number of bytes, and specifically each has one byte. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of the command data CD1 to CD3 may have a plurality of bytes.

In each of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3, the upper 2 bits have a function as an identification bit, and the remaining 6 bits have a function as a data bit. The identification bit is set with data indicating which one of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is its own command data. Specifically, "01" is set in the identification bit of the first command data CD1 as shown in FIG. 12A, and the identification bit of the second command data CD2 is set in FIG. 12B. “10” is set as shown in FIG. 11 and the identification bit of the third command data CD3 is set to “11” as shown in FIG. 12C.

Data corresponding to the instruction content from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 is set in the data bit. The data bit of the first command data CD1 is set with data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the type of the first type as the outline content of the instruction content. Specifically, if it is a command for instructing execution of an effect, data for the type of effect to be executed in the effect for game times, the effect for opening/closing execution mode, and the effect during standby is set, and the notification is executed. If it is a command for instructing, the data indicating which of the injustice notification and the status notification is the execution target is set.

The data bit of the second command data CD2 is set with data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the type of the second type included in the type of the first type designated by the first command data CD1. Further, the data bit of the third command data CD3 is set with data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the type of the third type included in the type of the second type designated by the second command data CD2.

With reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 13, the content of the command data CD1 to CD3 will be described by taking a command for instructing execution of performance as an example.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, a notice display may be generated as an effect for game play. The notice display is a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, or the symbols are variably displayed in a part of the symbol columns in a plurality of symbol columns. It is an effect that is performed in a situation where there is a reach display, the notice display is more likely to occur than when it is not performed, and the game time corresponding to the big hit result becomes the game time corresponding to the miss result Compared with this, the notice display is likely to occur. A plurality of types of the notice display are set, and as part of them, a step-up notice and a conversation notice are set.

The step-up notice is an effect that is executed step by step, and the reach display is performed depending on the combination of the number of steps to be executed, the display color of the character displayed when the effect is executed, and the type of the notice character to be displayed. It is suggested that the expected degree of being hit and the expectation that the jackpot result will occur. Further, the conversation notice is an effect in which a display is made as if a conversation is being performed between the first notice character and the second notice character, the content of the conversation to be executed, the display color of the characters of the conversation, The combination of the types of the first notice character and the second notice character to be displayed suggests the degree of expectation of reach display and the degree of expectation of a jackpot result.

When the first command data CD1 is represented by a hexadecimal number and is "41", it corresponds to the step-up notice. In the case of a step-up notice, the second command data CD2 indicates which of the step number, the character color, and the notice character is the instruction target, and the third command data CD3 indicates the second command data CD2. The specific content of the instruction target is instructed. In this case, the content instructed by one type of command is only one of the plurality of types of second type content included in the step-up notice. That is, when the step-up notice is executed, it is necessary to instruct the display CPU 72 about the number of stages, the character color, and the type of each of the notice characters. Is instructed. Therefore, when instructing the execution of the step-up notice, it is necessary to transmit the commands including the command data CD1 to CD3 for the types of the contents of the second type, specifically, three types. The sound-light side MPU 62 transmits a 1-byte end command to the display CPU 72 when the transmission of three types of commands instructing the execution of the step-up notice is completed. The end command has a data structure that is not used in other commands. Specifically, it is "FF" in hexadecimal. When the display CPU 72 receives the end command, the display CPU 72 specifies that the transmission of the command group to be instructed this time is completed. As a result, even if a plurality of types of commands including the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted to instruct the execution of the step notice, it is displayed that all of the commands have been received. It becomes possible for the CPU 72 to clearly understand.

When the first command data CD1 is represented by a hexadecimal number and is "42", it corresponds to the conversation notice. In the case of a conversation announcement, the second command data CD2 indicates the content of the conversation, the character color, which of the first notice character and the second notice character is the instruction target, and the third command data CD3 indicates the second command. The specific content of the instructed object instructed by the data CD2 is instructed. In this case, also in the case of the conversation announcement, as in the case of the step-up announcement, the content instructed by one type of command is only one of the plurality of types of the second type content included in the conversation announcement. That is, when executing the conversation notice, it is necessary to instruct the display CPU 72 about the content of the conversation, the character color, and the respective types of the first notice character and the second notice character. Only the contents of the second type are designated. Therefore, when instructing the execution of the conversation announcement, it is necessary to transmit the commands including the command data CD1 to CD3 for the type of the contents of the second type, specifically, four types. When the sound-light side MPU 62 completes the transmission of the four types of commands for instructing the execution of the conversation notice, the one-byte end command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 as in the case of the step-up notice. Accordingly, even if a plurality of types of commands including the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted to instruct the execution of the conversation notice, it is displayed that all of the commands have been received. It becomes possible for the CPU 72 to clearly understand. Even if the total number of commands transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 differs between the step-up notice and the conversation notice, the end command is transmitted when all the commands corresponding to each effect are completed. Thus, the display CPU 72 can clearly understand that all the commands corresponding to each effect have been received.

It should be noted that, in order to indicate the contents of the plurality of types of the second type even when instructing the execution of other effects, a plurality of types of commands are transmitted at the time of transmitting the command instructing the execution of a predetermined effect, and the transmission of those commands. When is completed, the end command is transmitted. In addition, although there is an effect in which the content of the second type is only one type, when instructing the execution of such an effect, one type of command including each command data CD1 to CD3 is transmitted and the transmission is completed. If so, the end command is sent. Further, the sound-light side MPU 62 finally transmits the end command when transmitting not only the command for the execution instruction of the effect but also the command for the notification execution instruction. As a result, the display CPU 72 can grasp whether or not the reception of the command from the sound-light side MPU 62 for performing the predetermined instruction is completed, depending on whether or not the end command is received.

When the sound-light side MPU 62 instructs the display CPU 72 to execute the notice display executed in the predetermined period, the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are associated with the contents of the second stage included in the notice display. Multiple types of commands consisting of are sent. As a result, even when the number of types in the second step is increased or decreased, or when the content of the second step is changed, the command can be changed in units of the corresponding second step. It can be facilitated.

In addition, even if the data of one command is rewritten in the middle of transmission due to noise or the like, by adopting a configuration in which a plurality of types of commands are transmitted in a one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the second type in this way. It is possible to limit the effect to the content of one type of the second type.

Even when the instruction content from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 is diversified, the instruction content can be determined stepwise by the plurality of command data CD1 to CD3, even when the pachinko machine 10 is designed. The command design can be facilitated.

Further, the data used as the second command data CD2 in the command for instructing the execution of the step-up notice is used as it is as the second command data CD2 in the command for instructing the execution of the conversation advance, and similarly, The data used as the third command data CD3 in the command for instructing the execution of the step-up advance notice is used as it is as the third command data CD3 in the command for instructing the execution of the conversation advance notice. The data used as each of the command data CD1 to CD3 are stored in the ROM 63 in advance. However, as described above, the data used as the second command data CD2 and the data used as the third command data CD3 are Due to the configuration commonly used for a plurality of types of commands, it is possible to suppress the data capacity required to store command data in the ROM 63.

Hereinafter, the command selection process executed by the sound-light side MPU 62 for transmitting the command will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the data indicating the transmission timing of the command to the display CPU 72 is set in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the control pattern table (step S501: YES), the command at the current transmission timing is displayed from the control pattern table. The number of types is read and a value corresponding to the number of types is set in the command type counter provided in the RAM 64 (step S502). After that, the address data of the command area of the ROM 63 designated by the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the control pattern table and corresponding to the value of the current command type number counter is specified. Then, according to the specified address data, the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 are read from the ROM 63 (steps S503 to S505), and the read command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted as commands. The target area is set in the ring buffer provided in the RAM 64 (step S506). The sound-light side MPU 62 sequentially reads out the commands set in the ring buffer and transmits them to the display CPU 72 by a transmission interruption process activated periodically (for example, 1 msec) separately from the timer interruption process (FIG. 9). In this case, the commands set in the ring buffer are transmitted in order from the earliest timing.

Then, the value of the command type number counter is decremented by 1 (step S507), and it is determined whether the value of the command type number counter after the decrement by 1 is "0" (step S508). If it is not "0", the processes of steps S503 to S506 are executed for the command corresponding to the updated value of the command type number counter. If it is "0", the end command is read from the ROM 63 and set in the ring buffer in step S509.

<Processing Configuration of Display CPU 72>
Next, the processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process which is repeatedly activated by the display CPU 72 in a predetermined cycle, specifically, in a cycle of 20 msec.

When outputting the image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 41, the VDP 76 starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner portion of the display surface P, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signal is sequentially output to the aligned dots, and the image signal is sequentially output to the dots from left to right for each horizontal line from the top. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs the V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 72 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt process, first, a command analysis process is executed in step S601. In the command analysis process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16A, it is determined in step S701 whether a new command is received from the sound-light side MPU 62. When the display CPU 72 receives a strobe signal from the sound-light side MPU 62, it starts the command interrupt process with the highest priority regardless of the process being executed at that time, and receives the command received at the input port 77. , Is stored in the command storage buffer 101 provided in the work RAM 73.

More specifically, the command storage buffer 101 includes a first unprocessed area 102, a second unprocessed area 103, and a third unprocessed area 104, as shown in FIG. Each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 includes five command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, 104a to 104e. Each of the command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, 104a to 104e can store one type of command including the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3. It has a 3-byte data structure. In addition, the number of command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, 104a to 104e provided in each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 is such that a performance execution instruction or a notification execution instruction is executed once from the sound-light side MPU 62. The maximum number of commands that can be sent is more than the maximum. As a result, it is possible to store a command group transmitted at the time of one execution instruction of the effect and a command group transmitted at the time of one notification execution instruction in each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104. Further, the number of unprocessed areas 102 to 104 is equal to or larger than the maximum number of command groups that the display CPU 72 can wait in an unprocessed state. As a result, in a configuration in which an unprocessed command group can wait, it is possible to prevent omission of execution of processing corresponding to the command group.

In the command interruption process, when a command is newly received after the end command is received last time, and if an unprocessed command group is not stored in the first unprocessed area 102, the command is processed in the first unprocessed area 102. And an unprocessed command group is stored in the first unprocessed area 102, the command is stored in the second unprocessed area 103, and an unprocessed command group is stored in the second unprocessed area 103. If it is stored, the command is stored in the third unprocessed area 104. Then, each time a command is received, command storage processing is sequentially executed for the command storage area of the unprocessed area that is the storage target until the end command is received. When the end command is received, the unprocessed area for command storage is set to the area in the next order. In the command interruption process, when the process of storing the command is executed, it is possible to specify which of the command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, 104a to 104e the command is stored in the unprocessed areas 102 to 104. Set the data for

Returning to the explanation of the command analysis process (FIG. 16A), it is determined in step S701 whether or not the storage of commands in the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 has been newly started. When an affirmative determination is made in step S701, "1" is set to the receiving flag provided in the work RAM 73 for specifying by the display CPU 72 whether or not the command group is being received. When the process of step S702 is executed, or when the receiving flag is set to "1" (step S703: YES), it is determined whether or not the end command is received in step S704. When the end command is received (step S704: YES), the value of the unprocessed counter provided in the work RAM 73 is incremented by 1 (step S705), and the receiving flag is cleared to "0" (step S706).

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), after executing the command analysis process in step S601, the value of the unprocessed counter of the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S602: YES), and the step A command corresponding process is executed in step S603, and the unprocessed counter value is decremented by 1 in step S604. The command handling process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the process of reading the command to be processed this time is executed (step S801). Specifically, the command stored in the first unprocessed area 102 in the command storage buffer 101 of the work RAM 73 is written in the area for the processing target command of the work RAM 73. When the writing is executed, each data in the second unprocessed area 103 is overwritten in the command storage buffer 101 in the first unprocessed area 102, and then each data in the third unprocessed area 104 is changed to the second unprocessed area 104. Overwrite the processing area 103.

After that, a value corresponding to the number of types of commands to be processed this time is set in the processing target counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S802). After that, the reference table corresponding to the first command data CD1 in the command to be processed this time is read from the memory module 74 (step S803). The reference table is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the data content of the first command data CD1, and specifies the display pattern table for executing the image display corresponding to the command to be processed on the symbol display device 41. The data to do is set.

The reference table RT when the data corresponding to the step-up notice is set in the first command data CD1 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

In the reference table RT, the addresses of the execution target table are set in a one-to-one correspondence with all combinations of the types of the third types that can occur for all the types of the second types in the advance notice. For example, the type of the third type is “2” when the type of the second type is “step number”, and the type of the third type is “red” when the type of the second type is “text color”. And the type of the third type is “24th character” when the type of the second type is “advance character”, the address of the second stage red 24 table in the reference table RT is the execution target table. It is set as an address.

The execution target table displays an image for one frame at each image update timing when a moving image corresponding to one command group transmission from the sound-light side MPU 62 is displayed on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41. This is an information group that defines the processing required to perform the processing. In the execution target table, pointer information corresponding to the number of update timings included in the display period of the moving image by the execution target table is set, and the update timing corresponding to the pointer information is associated with each pointer information. The data for enabling the display of the image in is set.

Returning to the explanation of the command handling process (FIG. 17), after reading the reference table in step S803, the value of the current process target counter among the commands written in the process target command area of the work RAM 73 in step S801. Is read out, and data corresponding to the combination of the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 in the command is written in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S804). The value of the processing target counter has a one-to-one correspondence with the command storage areas 102a to 102e of the first unprocessed area 102, and in step S804, the processing target is processed from the command storage area corresponding to the current value of the processing target counter. The command written in the command area is the read target of the data.

After executing the processing of step S804, the value of the processing target counter is decremented by 1 in step S805. Then, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the value of the processing target counter after subtracting 1 is "0". If it is not "0", the process of step S804 is executed for the command corresponding to the value of the updated process target counter. If the value is "0", the process of reading the execution target table is executed in step S807. In the read processing, the address of the execution target table corresponding to the data read to the register of the display CPU 72 in step S804 is specified from the reference table read in step S803, and the area of the specified address in the memory module 74 is specified. The stored execution target table is read into the work RAM 73. As a result, the reading of the execution target table corresponding to the command to be processed is completed, and the moving image corresponding to the command to be processed can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

By the way, in the situation where the display control based on the execution target table for executing the effects such as the game turn effect, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode and the standby effect is being executed, the execution for executing the injustice notification or the status notification is executed. When the target table is read, the notification execution target table is read to the work RAM 73 while the effect execution target table that has already been read is stored and held in the work RAM 73. Then, in a task process (FIG. 19) described later, an arithmetic process that enables display of an image corresponding to both of these execution target tables is executed, and in a pointer update process (step S607) described below, each pointer of those execution target tables is executed. Update information.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15 ), when the execution target table for injustice notification or status notification is newly set in the command handling process of step S603 (step S605: YES), or for injustice notification Alternatively, even when the execution target table for status notification is not newly set (step S605: NO), the operation completion flag provided in the work RAM 73 is set to "1" (step S606: YES). ), in step S607, the pointer update process is executed, and the operation completion flag is cleared to "0". In the pointer update processing, the pointer information of the current execution target table is updated to the pointer information corresponding to the next update timing. In step S607 immediately after the execution target table is newly set in the command corresponding process (step S603), the pointer information update process is executed so that the pointer information corresponds to the first update timing. The calculation completion flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not various calculation processes for displaying an image corresponding to one update timing have been completed in the previous process execution time of the V interrupt process. is there.

After executing the processing of step S607, task processing is executed in step S608. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time, the parameters necessary for instructing the VDP 76 to draw are calculated. Specifically, as parameters, the address information of the area where the image data of the control target is stored in the memory module 74, the address information of the area to which the image data of the control target is transferred in the VRAM 75, and the image data of the control target are used for drawing. Information of the frame regions 82a and 82b to be created data, coordinate information when writing the image data to be controlled in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be created, scale information when writing the image data, and Information on uniform α value (semitransparent value) when writing image data is included.

Then, in step S609, a drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in the VDP 76 will be described later in detail.

The task process of step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the delay flag provided in the work RAM 73. In the task process, various calculation processes such as a background calculation process, an effect calculation process and a symbol calculation process are executed as will be described later in detail. In this case, the period required to execute various arithmetic processes varies depending on the number of individual images displayed on the symbol display device 41, the type of individual image, and the display mode of the individual image. As a result of the change in the period, it is possible that the timing for starting the next processing time of the V interrupt processing is reached by the time the execution of all the arithmetic processing in the task processing is completed. In this case, if the execution of the V interrupt process is awaited, it becomes impossible for the display CPU 72 to quickly deal with the command transmission from the sound-light side MPU 62. Therefore, when it is time to start the next processing time of the V interrupt processing during the execution of the task processing, the task processing is not continued as it is, but a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started. Has become. However, when a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, the calculation result of the task processing at that time is stored and retained, and the operation processing is performed from the middle of the calculation in the task processing of the V interrupt processing of the new processing time. By restarting, the processing for one update timing is prevented from being left unexecuted. As a result, for example, in the configuration in which the update of the parameter for displaying the predetermined individual image is controlled by the difference from the previous update value, the parameter update skips once and the subsequent parameter update cannot be performed accurately. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as occurrence. The delay flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not the execution of various arithmetic processes in the task process is once interrupted and delayed as described above. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data.

When "1" is not set in the delay flag (step S901: NO), the control start setting process is executed (step S902). In the control start setting process, it is first determined based on the currently set execution target table whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current process. If it exists, the work RAM 73 is searched for a free buffer area for performing various calculations for controlling the individual image, and one-to-one correspondence with the individual image grasped as the control start target. To secure a free buffer area. Further, the initialization processing is executed for all the secured free buffer areas, and the parameter information for starting the control corresponding to the individual image is set in the initialized free buffer areas.

In a succeeding step S903, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in one frame of images after the current processing.

Then, in step S904, new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted, and in step S905 immediately after that, new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited, and then the background calculation process is executed (step S906). In the background calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped from the still image for the backmost and the background sprite that form the background image. Further, with respect to the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation on the virtual two-dimensional plane is calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the various parameter information thus derived into the area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image.

After that, new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S907, and new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in step S908 immediately after that, and then the production calculation process is executed (step S909). In the production calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the production sprites that form the images of the productions to be displayed in various productions such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot production. Further, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the various parameter information thus derived into the area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image.

After that, new activation of the V interruption process is permitted in step S910, and new activation of the V interruption process is prohibited in step S911 immediately after that, and then symbol calculation processing is executed (step S912). In the symbol calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped from the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner in each game. Further, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the various parameter information thus derived into the area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image.

By the way, in each of the calculation processes of step S906, step S909, and step S912, animation data set to change various parameter information of an individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing comes. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. Further, in the symbol calculation process, when the execution target table for fraudulent notification or status notification is read in the work RAM 73, the calculation process for displaying the notification image corresponding to the execution target table is executed. A notification sprite for displaying the notification image and various parameter information applied to the notification sprite are derived.

After that, in step S913, "1" is set to the calculation completion flag provided in the work RAM 73. The calculation completion flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify that the background calculation process of step S906, the effect calculation process of step S909, and the symbol calculation process of step S912 have been executed once each.

After that, in step S914, a process of grasping the drawing instruction target is executed. In the process of recognizing the drawing instruction target, among the individual images that are the control update targets by the calculation processes of step S906, step S909, and step S912, the one frame image related to the drawing data creation instruction this time is included. The process of grasping the individual image is executed. The grasping is performed by referring to the coordinates of various individual images, the rotation angle, and the scale information, and executing a predetermined calculation. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. As described above, it is necessary to select the individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76 by setting only the individual images to be displayed as the individual images specified in the drawing list, not all the individual images for which control has been started. There is no need to uselessly perform drawing processing for individual images that are not display targets even if they are not sorted. As a result, the processing load on the VDP 76 can be reduced.

Here, when a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, new activation of the V interrupt processing is prohibited, but the background calculation processing in step S906 and the effect calculation processing in step S909. And, at each timing before the symbol calculation process in step S912 is executed, a new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted (step S904, step S907, and step S910). As a result, when the start timing of a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is reached at the time when step S904, step S907, or step S910 is executed, that is, 20 msec has already passed from the start of this V interrupt processing. If so, the task processing is interrupted at that point, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, and the processing of step S601 described above is started. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which the start of a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is awaited, although it is the start timing of a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing.

However, even when a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started in this way, the data corresponding to the processing result up to that time in the current task processing is stored and held as it is. Further, in this case, the address data corresponding to the process executed immediately before the start of a new process time of the V interrupt process is written in the interruption address area 111 provided in the work RAM 73. The address data written in the suspending address area 111 is referred to when the task processing in the V interrupt processing of a new processing time is started, so that the execution of the processing is resumed from the timing at which the interrupt was generated in the previous task processing. It becomes possible to do.

If new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in steps S904, S907, and S910, the new activation is prohibited in steps S905, S908, and S911, and then the background calculation process in step S906, The effect calculation process of step S909 and the symbol calculation process of step S912 are executed. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent a new processing time of the V interrupt processing from being started during execution of various arithmetic processing. It is assumed that if a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started during the execution of various arithmetic processing, the amount of data in the middle of the arithmetic processing to be stored and held will be extremely large. The contents of the address data when returning to the state in the middle of calculation in various processing times may be complicated. On the other hand, by prohibiting the new activation of the V interrupt processing before the various arithmetic processing is started, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is not started during the various arithmetic processing. It becomes possible.

When a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started during the execution of the task processing, the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is executed without executing the processing of setting the operation completion flag to "1" in step S913. The processing of step S601 is started. Then, a negative determination is made in step S606 assuming that "1" is not set in the calculation completion flag. In this case, in step S610, the delay flag of the work RAM 73 is set to "1".

If the delay flag is set to "1", an affirmative decision is made in step S901 in the subsequent task processing (FIG. 19). In this case, after the delay flag is cleared to "0" (step S915), the address data is read from the interruption address area 111 of the work RAM 73 to start a new processing time of the V interrupt processing in the previous task processing. The process jumps to the process executed immediately before (step S916). As a result, it becomes possible to resume the execution of the processing from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous task processing.

In the V interrupt process (FIG. 15 ), when a negative determination is made in step S606, a delay command is further transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62 (step S611). The delay command includes pointer information data in the current execution target table. The process when the delay command is received by the sound-light side MPU 62 is executed by the display side command corresponding process of step S306 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, when the delay command is received (step S1001: YES), the pointer information of the execution target table is read from the delay command received this time (step S1002). After that, based on the pointer information of the control pattern table read in the RAM 64 of the sound emission control device 60 and the pointer information read from the delay command, it corresponds to the occurrence of the update timing delay in the display CPU 72. The pointer range for the delay is calculated (step S1003).

Since the output timing of the command to the display CPU 72 is set in the control pattern table, it is possible to derive the pointer information of the timing at which the execution instruction of the effect corresponding to the current execution target table in the display CPU 72 is issued. is there. Further, although the cycle in which the pointer information of the control pattern table is updated in the sound-light side MPU 62 is different from the cycle in which the pointer information of the execution target table is updated in the display CPU 72, these cycles are predetermined cycles. Is almost constant at. The sound-light side MPU 62 can derive the original pointer information of the execution target table when the display CPU 72 has not interrupted the task processing from the current pointer information of the control pattern table. Then, from the difference between the derived pointer information and the pointer information grasped from the delay command of the display CPU 72, it is necessary to match the progress of control in the sound-light side MPU 62 with the progress of control in the display CPU 72. It is possible to derive the subtraction value of the pointer information of the control pattern table.

In step S1004, the derived subtraction value is subtracted from the current pointer information in the control pattern table to execute the adjustment processing of the pointer information. As a result, even if the display CPU 72 interrupts the task processing and delays the update of the pointer information of the execution target table, the pointer information of the control pattern table in the sound-light side MPU 62 is delayed. It becomes possible to correspond with the pointer information of the target table.

How the pointer information of the execution target table is adjusted in relation to the task processing will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 21A shows the activation timing of the V interrupt processing, FIG. 21B shows the execution period of the task processing, FIG. 21C shows the update timing of the pointer information of the execution target table, and FIG. 21D shows the transmission timing of the delay command, and FIG. 21E shows the timing when the display CPU 72 receives the notification execution command from the sound/light side MPU 62. In the following description, it is assumed that the pointer information is updated at the timing when the processing time of the V interrupt processing is newly started. Therefore, the pointer information is updated at the timing before the task processing is started. This also applies to the output timing of the delay command.

First, a case where an interruption occurs in the middle of a task process and a notification execution command is not received in the middle of the task process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21A, a new processing time of V interrupt processing is started at the timing of t1. In this case, the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. After that, the task processing is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 21B, and the task processing ends at the timing of t3 which is the timing before the new activation timing of the V interrupt processing (timing of t4). To do. In this case, the task processing is not interrupted.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21A, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started at the timing of t4, and the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21C. Then, at the timing of t5, the task processing is started as shown in FIG. However, at the timing of t6 during the execution of the task process, a new start timing of the V interrupt process is reached as shown in FIG. In this case, the currently executed task processing is interrupted as shown in FIG. 21B, and a new processing time of V interrupt processing is started.

At the timing of t6, the pointer information of the execution target table is not updated even if a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started. As a result, in the V interrupt processing of the new processing time, the task processing is started without updating the pointer information. Therefore, the data corresponding to the pointer information set in the previous processing time of the V interrupt processing is used. It becomes possible to execute the task processing performed. Further, at the timing of t6, a delay command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the sound-light side MPU 62 as shown in FIG. This makes it possible to adjust the pointer information of the control pattern table of the sound-light side MPU 62 in accordance with the delay in the situation where the update of the pointer information is delayed in the execution target table of the display CPU 72.

Next, a case where the task processing is interrupted and the notification execution command is received during the task processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21A, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started at the timing of t9, and the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21C. Then, at the timing of t10, the task processing is started as shown in FIG. However, at the timing of t12 during the execution of the task process, a new start timing of the V interrupt process is reached as shown in FIG. In this case, the currently executed task processing is interrupted as shown in FIG. 21B, and a new processing time of V interrupt processing is started.

However, the timing t11 is after the timing t10, which is the start timing of the interrupted task processing, and before the timing t12, which is the start timing of a new processing time of the V interrupt processing. At timing, the notification execution is received from the sound-light side MPU 62 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even if the task processing is interrupted at the timing of t12 and a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21C. Further, the delay command is not transmitted as shown in FIG.

After that, task processing is started at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. In the task process, since the calculation corresponding to the data for one piece of pointer information remains unexecuted in the performance execution target table for the various calculation processes for performance, the setting of various parameter information is performed normally. There is a possibility that the effect image display may not be smoothly performed due to the fact that it is not performed. On the other hand, in the task process, since the various calculation processes for notification are started, it is possible to immediately start displaying the image for notification. After that, the task processing ends at the timing of t14, which is the timing before the new start timing of the V interrupt processing (timing of t15). In this case, the task processing is not interrupted.

When a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, new activation of the V interrupt processing is prohibited, but the background calculation processing of step S906, the effect calculation processing of step S909, and step S912. At each timing before the symbol calculation process is executed, new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted (step S904, step S907, and step S910). As a result, when the start timing of a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is reached at the time when step S904, step S907, or step S910 is executed, that is, 20 msec has already passed from the start of this V interrupt processing. If so, the task processing is interrupted at that point, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, and the processing of step S601 described above is started. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which the start of a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is awaited, although it is the start timing of a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing.

However, even when a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started in this way, the data corresponding to the processing result up to that time in the current task processing is stored and held as it is. Further, in this case, the address data corresponding to the process executed immediately before the start of a new process time of the V interrupt process is written in the interruption address area 111 provided in the work RAM 73. The address data written in the suspending address area 111 is referred to when the task processing in the V interrupt processing of a new processing time is started, so that the execution of the processing is resumed from the timing at which the interrupt was generated in the previous task processing. It becomes possible to do.

When the new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in steps S904, S907 and S910, the new activation is prohibited in steps S905, S908 and S911, and then the background calculation process in step S906, The production calculation process of S909 and the symbol calculation process of step S912 are executed. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent a new processing time of the V interrupt processing from being started during execution of various arithmetic processing. It is assumed that if a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started during the execution of various arithmetic processing, the amount of data in the middle of the arithmetic processing to be stored and held will be extremely large. The contents of the address data when returning to the state in the middle of calculation in various processing times may be complicated. On the other hand, by prohibiting the new activation of the V interrupt processing before the various arithmetic processing is started, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is not started during the various arithmetic processing. It becomes possible.

When the task processing is interrupted in the display CPU 72 and the task processing is restarted from the interrupted state in the next V interrupt processing, the delay command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the sound-light side MPU 62. In the sound-light side MPU 62, the pointer information of the control pattern table is adjusted according to the delay. As a result, even if the delay occurs, it is possible to synchronize the contents of the effect execution control in the sound-light side MPU 62 and the contents of the effect execution control in the display CPU 72.

When the display CPU 72 interrupts the task processing, a negative determination is made in step S606 of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15), so that the pointer information in the execution target table is not updated and the sound-light side MPU 62 is not updated. In the configuration in which the delay command is transmitted, even if the task processing is interrupted, if the delay non-occurrence condition is satisfied, the determination processing in step S606 is not executed. The information is updated and the delay command is not sent. Specifically, in the case where the execution target table for injustice notification or status notification is newly read to the work RAM 73, an affirmative determination is made in step S605, and the determination processing of step S606 is executed. Instead, the process of step S607 is executed. As a result, although it may not be possible to smoothly display the effect image, it is possible to give top priority to the start of displaying the image corresponding to the injustice notification or the status notification. That is, even if the notification execution target table is newly read to the work RAM 73 in the command handling process, the notification image is displayed unless the pointer update process of step S607 is executed for the execution target table thereafter. Does not start. On the other hand, when the notification execution target table is newly read, the pointer update processing of step S607 is executed even if the interruption of the task processing has occurred last time, so that the notification It is possible to prevent the start of image display from being delayed.

<Basic processing in VDP76>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

In the VDP 76, a process of setting the value of the register 92 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 72, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72, And the process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the content of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 22A to 22C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, target buffer information, which is information indicating in which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b drawing data corresponding to one frame image related to the drawing list is set, is set. Has been done. Further, in the header information, the presence/absence of decoding designation and the address information of the moving image data to be decoded are set.

In the drawing list, in addition to the header information described above, a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame are set, and further, the drawing order information of each image data and the image data of each image data are set. Parameter information and are set. Specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be serially-numbered numerical information, and the information of the image data to be used in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information is set. Further, the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

The drawing order is set so that an individual image to be displayed is positioned so as to be positioned on the back side of the display surface P in an image for one frame, and the individual images are to be drawn first. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 22A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and the sprite data B is further written. Note that in the image for one frame, the individual images are displayed in the order of the background image, the effect image, and the design so as to be on the front side.

Plural kinds of parameters are set in the parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3),.... As for the parameter P(1) of the background data, specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, the address information of the area where the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area to which the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75. Address information, coordinate information indicating the position on the two-dimensional plane when writing background data, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the two-dimensional plane when writing background data, and the initial of the background data. Information on a scale indicating the magnification when writing to the frame areas 82a and 82b with respect to the size set as the state, and uniform α value information indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) when writing the background data. And information for specifying α data indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target are set. The types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A as shown in FIG.

The coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels forming the image data, but the coordinate information for one image data is set. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as the reference pixel for which the coordinate information is designated. The VDP 76 can recognize that the information of the designated coordinate is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when the image data is arranged, the one pixel at the center is on the designated coordinate. .. As a result, the information capacity (that is, the amount of data) of the coordinate information to be designated for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to be able to recognize the coordinates for all pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the central one pixel, and may be a pixel having a corner angle such as an upper left corner or an upper right corner. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as rectangular shapes, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixel by setting the corner pixel as the reference pixel.

Further, the uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in the memory module 74 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

In the situation where the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, the transparency of the background data and the sprite data may be controlled uniformly for all pixels instead of being finely controlled in pixel units. It is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to deal with uniform α values, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying α data.

Drawing processing in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data instructed by the drawing list already received is completed. If the drawing data has been created, it is determined in step S1102 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, in step S1103, a corresponding process at the time of reception is executed.

In the corresponding processing at the time of reception, it is grasped from which information of the target buffer included in the drawing list, which frame area 82a or 82b the drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is drawn.

In a succeeding step S1104, a content grasping process is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set to be read in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, in the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, based on the grasping result of the content grasping process in step S1104, the image data of the drawing target this time is written in the frame regions 82a and 82b set as the generation targets.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that the drawing data instructed by the already received drawing list is being created, the drawing list counter is updated in step S1106. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the processing of steps S1104 and S1105 is performed on the switched image data. In other words, the drawing data is created a plurality of times to create the drawing data of the image for one frame designated by one drawing list.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data is processed in one drawing process is also possible. It is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each of the processing times, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing processing.

When a negative determination is made in step S1102 or after the processing of step S1105 is executed, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the image signal output for one frame is completed in the display circuit 94. If it is not completed, the main drawing process is ended as it is, and if it is completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S1108, and then the main drawing process is ended.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data, but since the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of the drawing data corresponding to the update timing that is one frame after the relevant frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame regions 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the selector circuit. In the above, the frame areas 82a and 82b which are the drawing targets of the drawing data are regulated so as not to be the output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Structure for performing color change production>
Next, a configuration for performing the color change effect will be described.

24A to 24C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the color change effect. As shown in FIGS. 24(a-1) to 24(a-3), the color change effect is a moving image in which the character CH1 for color change effect performs a predetermined operation in a predetermined period including a plurality of image update timings. When displayed, the display color of the color change target area CR of the color change effect character CH1 is changed according to the game situation. For example, when a color change effect is executed as an effect for game play, the player is informed of the expectation level of reach display occurrence and the expectation level of a jackpot result depending on the display color of the color change target region CR. When the color change effect is applied to the slot machine instead of the pachinko machine 10, the color change target area CR may be displayed in a display color corresponding to the type of the winning combination in the internal lottery.

The color-changing effect character CH1 is displayed so that the player recognizes that a person having a face, a body, both hands, and both feet is represented. The color change target regions CR are set at a plurality of locations in the color change effect character CH1. Specifically, the color change target area CR is set to the head portion, both shoulder portions, and the body portion of the color change effect character CH1. The display colors of the color-change target regions CR at a plurality of locations are set to the same color. For example, when the display color of the color change target area CR is set to blue, the head portion, both shoulders and body portion of the color change effect character CH1 are displayed in blue, and the display color of the color change target area CR is displayed. Is set to red, the head portion, both shoulder portions and the body portion of the color change effect character CH1 are displayed in red. At the final stage of the color change effect, as shown in FIG. 24A-3, the color change effect character image CH1 displays the color change effect image EG1. An effect image is an image showing a blast, an image showing water droplets, a light emission image showing how light is emitted from a light source to the surroundings, and an aura image showing as if the surroundings of the character are emitting light. In addition, it is an image for enhancing the visual effect. As the effect image EG1 for color change effect, an image in which light rays are emitted to the surroundings from the character CH1 for color change effect is displayed.

When performing the color change effect, the base still image data BD1, BD2 and BD3 shown in FIGS. 24(b-1) to 24(b-3) and FIGS. 24(c-1) to 24(c-). The part image data PD1, PD2 and PD3 shown in 3) are used. The base still image data BD1 to BD3 are image data for displaying the color change effect character CH1. The parts image data PD1 to PD3 are image data for overwriting the color change target area CR in the color change effect character CH1 based on the base still image data BD1 to BD3, and for adding the color change effect effect image EG1. Image data. After the base still image data BD1 to BD3 shown in FIGS. 24(b-1) to 24(b-3) are drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b, FIGS. 24(c-1) to 24( By drawing the parts image data PD1 to PD3 shown in c-3), as shown in FIGS. 24(a-1) to 24(a-3), a color change effect is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. The display character CH1 is displayed, and the display color of the color change target region CR is changed according to the situation.

Hereinafter, a specific configuration for executing the color change effect will be described. First, the data structure for executing the color change effect will be described. FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 74 for executing the color change effect. As shown in FIG. 25A, in the memory module 74, base moving image data BMD for enabling derivation of the base still image data BD1 to BD3, first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3, A color palette data group CP is stored in advance.

The base moving image data BMD is image data that is inter-frame compressed so as to have a plurality of difference data with one frame of still image data as a reference and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 system. When the base moving image data BMD is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames. Specifically, in the base moving image data BMD, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data is one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have. The I picture data is data that can be used to create still image data for one frame by itself when decoding. The P picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction by referring to I picture data or P picture data preceding by one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. .. When decoding B picture data, bidirectional prediction is performed by referring to I picture data or P picture data before one frame or a plurality of frames and I picture data or P picture data after one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. It is data that can create still image data for one frame. In the compressed data of the base moving image data BMD, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame,..., M-1 frame. In addition, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m+1th frame,..., The n−1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

The number of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 created by expanding the base moving image data BMD corresponds to all the frames included in the execution period of the color change effect. As shown in FIGS. 24(b-1) to 24(b-3), the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are image data for displaying only the color-changing effect character CH1. By using all the base still image data BD1 to BD3, it is possible to display a moving image in which the color-changing effect character CH1 is performing an action according to a predetermined action path. Further, in each pixel of the base still image data BD1 to BD3, 1-byte color information is set for each of RGB, and an opaque α value is set.

The first to n-th parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in the same number as the base still image data BD1 to BD3 so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the base still image data BD1 to BD3. As shown in FIGS. 24(c-1) to 24(c-3), the first to n-th parts image data PD1 to PD3 are included in the color change effect character CH1 based on the corresponding base still image data BD1 to BD3. The color change target area CR is set so that the color change target area CR having the same position, shape, and size as the color change target area CR can be displayed. In this case, the data of each of the parts image data PD1 to PD3 is set so that the plurality of color change target regions CR are displayed at positions distant from each other. The data of the frame region FR that fills the space between the plurality of color change target regions CR is set so that it can be handled as one image data. No color information is set for each pixel of the frame region FR, and a completely transparent α value is set for each pixel. On the other hand, although 1-byte color information is set for each pixel in the color-change target region CR, the α value is not set. Therefore, when the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are overwritten on the base still image data BD1 to BD3, an image based on the parts image data PD1 to PD3 is displayed in the color change target area CR, but other areas are displayed. For, the images based on the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are displayed as they are.

Of the parts image data PD1 to PD3, the parts image data for a plurality of frames from the frame at the intermediate timing on the end side of the color change effect to the frame at the end timing are as shown in FIG. Not only the color change target area CR but also data for displaying the color change effect effect image EG1 is set. For each pixel for displaying the color change effect effect image EG1, 1 byte of color information is set and an α value which is a semitransparent value is set. When such part image data is overwritten on the base still image data, not only the color change target region CR in the color change effect character CH1 is overwritten, but also the color change effect as shown in FIG. The semi-transparent color change effect effect image EG1 is displayed around the use character CH1. Then, the state in which the color change effect effect image EG1 is displayed in this manner continues for a plurality of frames until the frame at the end timing.

The color palette data group CP includes a plurality of color palettes CP1 and CP2 for designating a display color to be applied to the color information of the color change target area CR in each of the parts image data PD1 to PD3. The color palettes CP1 and CP2 are table data in which the color information is defined in a one-to-one correspondence with all the data that can be set in each pixel of the parts image data PD1 to PD3, and the color palette CP1 to be used. , CP2, the color information corresponding to the data set in each pixel is derived.

As shown in FIGS. 25(b-1) and 25(b-2), data is set so that the colors of the respective color palettes CP1 and CP2 are different from each other. For example, in the case of the color palette CP1 of FIG. 25(b-1), the basic color is red, and in the case of the color palette CP2 of FIG. 25(b-2), the basic color is green. Therefore, when the color palette CP1 of FIG. 25(b-1) is applied, the color change target region CR of each part image data PD1 to PD3 is based on red, and the color palette CP1 of FIG. 25(b-1) is used. If is applied, the color change target region CR based on each of the parts image data PD1 to PD3 is based on green. Since the color palettes CP1 and CP2 are data in which only the relationship between color information and display colors is determined, the data capacity of one color palette CP1 and CP2 is smaller than the data capacity of one part image data PD1 to PD3. Furthermore, the total data capacity of all the color palettes CP1 and CP2 included in the color palette data group CP is smaller than the data capacity of one part image data PD1 to PD3. Furthermore, in a configuration in which three or more display colors of the color change target region CR are set, the sum of all the data capacities of the parts image data PD1 to PD3 and all the data capacities of the color palettes CP1 and CP2 is the base. The moving picture data BMD is smaller than the doubled data capacity. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity required to store the image data in advance, as compared with the configuration in which the base moving image data BMD is prepared for the types of display colors of the color change target area CR.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the above color change effect will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for color change effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the color change effect is executed by the effect calculation process of step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). Further, the calculation process for the color change effect is activated when the information about the color change effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the start timing of the color change effect (step S1201: YES), the respective addresses of the base moving image data BMD and the first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3 in the memory module 74 are grasped (step S1202 and step). S1203). Further, the addresses in the memory module 74 of the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the display colors set in the execution target table this time are grasped (step S1204). Then, in step S1205, the color change effect start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the color change effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

When a negative determination is made in step S1201 or the processing of step S1205 is executed, various addresses corresponding to the current frame number set in the current pointer information in the execution target table are grasped (step S1206). Specifically, when the base moving image data BMD is decoded and the base still image data BD1 to BD3 for a plurality of frames are expanded in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the base still image data corresponding to the current frame number. The address of the area where BD1 to BD3 are stored, the address of the area where the part image data PD1 to PD3 corresponding to the current frame number is stored in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, and the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 The address of the area where the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are stored is grasped.

In subsequent step S1207, various parameter information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be used this time is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is stored in the work RAM 73 in the base still image data. The control information is updated by writing in the areas secured in correspondence with the BD1 to BD3 and the parts image data PD1 to PD3. After that, in step S1208, the color change effect designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the color change effect should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

When the arithmetic processing for color change effect is executed as described above, the base still image data BD1 corresponding to the current frame number is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609). To BD3 and the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are set as drawing targets, and the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are set as use targets. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information applied to the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and parts image data PD1 to PD3 is set, and also color change effect designation information is set. In addition, when it is the start timing of the color change effect, the color change effect start designation information is set.

Next, the color changing effect setting process and the color changing effect writing process executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for color change effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23), and the writing process for color change effect is the drawing process (FIG. 23). Is executed as a part of the writing process executed in step S1105. Further, when the color change effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the color change effect and the writing process for the color change effect are executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the color change effect designation information is set in association with the image data for effect, the setting process for color change effect and the write process for color change effect are performed in the drawing list of this time. , It is activated when it is the rendering order of the image data for presentation.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the color change effect.

When the color change effect start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S1301: YES), the base moving image data BMD is stored in the memory module 74 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area is grasped, and based on the grasped result, the base moving image data BMD is read from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S1302). Then, the decoding process of the base moving image data BMD is executed using the moving image decoder 93 (step S1303). As a result, all the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are expanded, stored and held in the base moving image area provided in the expansion buffer 81.

After that, in step S1304, the address of the area in which the first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3 are stored in the memory module 74 is grasped from the information of the address set in the drawing list, and the grasped result is obtained. Based on this, all of the first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3 are read from the memory module 74 to the part image area provided in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. In step S1305, the address of the area in which the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are stored is grasped from the information of the address set in the drawing list, and the memory module is based on the grasped result. The color palettes CP1 and CP2 from 74 are read into the palette area provided in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, or if the process of step S1305 is executed, in step S1306, the information of the address where the base still image data BD1 to BD3 to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. At the same time, in step S1307, the information of the address where the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In step S1308, the parameter information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 is grasped from the information set in the drawing list.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the writing process for color change effect.

First, the base still image data BD1 to BD3 to be drawn this time are drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. This drawing is performed based on the coordinates designated in the drawing list in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b (step S1401).

After that, in steps S1402 to S1406, the base still image data BD1 in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b is displayed on the drawing target part image data PD1 to PD3 in accordance with the color palettes PD1 and PD2 corresponding to the current display color. ~ BD3 overwrites each drawn dot.

Specifically, first, in step S1402, a value corresponding to the total number of pixels in the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn this time is set in the write processing counter provided in the register 92. Then, in step S1403, the color information corresponding to the data set in the pixel corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter in the part image data PD1 to PD3 of the current drawing target is associated with the current display color. It is read from the color palettes PD1 and PD2. In step S1404, the color information read in step S1403 is overwritten on the dot corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b.

By the way, when the pixel of this time corresponds to the frame area FR other than the color change target area CR or the color change effect image EG1, colorless color information is obtained regardless of which color palette PD1 or PD2. Is selected and the color information is overwritten so as to be completely transparent. In this case, the color information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 written in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b is maintained without being changed. If the pixel of this time corresponds to the color change target region CR, the color information based on the display color of this time is overwritten as opaque. When the pixel this time corresponds to the color change effect effect image EG1, the color information corresponding to the effect image EG1 is overwritten as semitransparent.

After that, in step S1405, the value of the write processing counter of the register 92 is decremented by 1, and in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is “0”. When it is not "0", the writing process of the pixel corresponding to the value of the writing process counter after subtraction is executed, and when it is "0", the writing process for the color change effect is finished as it is. ..

Part image data PD1 to PD3 are provided separately from the base moving image data BMD as image data for displaying the character CH1 for color change effect, and base still image data obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD. By overwriting the parts image data PD1 to PD3 on BD1 to BD3 and changing the types of the color palettes PD1 and PD2 to be applied to the parts image data PD1 to PD3, the same base moving image data BMD can be used for color reproduction. It is possible to change the display color of the color change target area CR of the change effect character CH1. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity required to store the image data in advance, as compared with the configuration in which the base moving image data BMD is prepared for the types of display colors of the color change target area CR.

The parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the base still image data BD1 to BD3 obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD. As a result, the display color of the color change target area CR of the color change effect character CH1 can be set to a predetermined color over the entire display period of the image based on the base moving image data BMD.

The display color of the color change target area CR is changed by changing the color palettes PD1 and PD2 applied to the parts image data PD1 to PD3. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity required to store the image data, as compared with the configuration in which the combination of the parts image data PD1 to PD3 is prepared in advance for the number of display colors that can be changed.

Although color information is set in the base still image data BD1 to BD3 obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD, an α value that is completely transparent or semitransparent is not set. If the still image data in which the α value is set to be completely transparent or semi-transparent is compressed as moving image data, the α value may adversely affect the difference data and the image quality may be deteriorated. Since the α value that is completely transparent or semi-transparent is not set, it is possible to compress the image data while preventing such deterioration of image quality. Similarly, the part image data PD1 to PD3 in which the completely transparent or translucent α value is set together with the color information are not compressed as moving image data but prepared as still image data. This makes it possible to prevent the image quality of the parts image data PD1 to PD3 from deteriorating.

Data for displaying the color change effect effect image EG1 is set in the part image data PD3 for a plurality of frames from the frame at the midway timing on the end side of the color change effect to the frame at the end timing. Since the data of the color-changing effect image EG1 is not only the color information but also the semi-transparent α value set, if such data is compressed as the base moving image data BMD, the α value adversely affects the difference data. This may affect the image quality. On the other hand, since the data of the effect image EG1 for color change effect is set for the part image data PD3 which is still image data, the image quality when displaying the effect image EG1 for color change effect is good. It becomes possible.

<Another form of configuration relating to color change production>
-The content of the image added by setting the other image data overlaid on the multiple still image data created by decoding the moving image data is the partial area of the character displayed by the moving image data. The present invention is not limited to the configuration of the above image, and may be a configuration in which a character different from the character displayed by the moving image data is added. In this case, a moving image is displayed in the moving image data such that the character performs a predetermined action, and a moving image is displayed so that the other character performs a predetermined action by the image data added to the still image data of the moving image data. It may be configured to be performed.

-By setting other image data so that it overlaps multiple still image data created by decoding the moving image data, the image corresponding to the other image data is displayed with respect to the image displayed by the moving image data. In the configuration to be added, instead of the configuration in which the content of the image to be added is changed by providing a plurality of other image data, the same image data is created for a plurality of still image data created by moving image data. The same still image may be added to the moving image display created by the moving image data by overlappingly setting the image data.

The parts image data PD1 to PD3 are not limited to being stored as still image data as they are, and the parts image data PD1 to PD3 may be compressed and provided as moving image data. In this case, when the color change effect is performed, still image data created by decoding both the base moving image data BMD and the moving image data corresponding to the part image data PD1 to PD3, and decoding the base moving image data BMD. On the other hand, it is necessary to set the still image data created by decoding the latter moving image data in an overlapping manner.

The base moving image data BMD is not limited to the configuration in which the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the still image data created by decoding the base moving image data BMD. The still image data created by doing so may be configured to be larger than the part image data PD1 to PD3. In this case, the same part image data PD1 to PD3 are applied to each still image data created from the base moving image data BMD at a predetermined plurality of update timings. For example, in a configuration in which the display position, shape, and size of the color-change target region CR are changed only once for a plurality of update timings, the part image data PD1 to PD3 may be provided for the number of the change timings. .. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts image data PD1 to PD3. Further, the number of parts image data PD1 to PD3 may be larger than the number of still image data created by decoding the base moving image data BMD. In this case, different part image data PD1 to PD3 can be set for the same still image data created from the base moving image data BMD, and the color change target area CH1 with the color change effect character CH1 stationary. The CR can be moved or deformed.

-Limited to a configuration in which only one part image data PD1 to PD3 is applied to the still image data created from the base moving image data BMD at each update timing in the period in which the moving image display is performed by the base moving image data BMD Instead, two or more parts image data may be applied at one update timing.

<Structure for effect production>
Next, a configuration for performing an effect effect will be described with reference to FIG. 29(a) to 29(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect effect.

As shown in FIG. 29A, the effect effect is such that the effect image EG2 overlaps the effect effect character CH2 from the front side of the display surface P in a situation where the effect effect character CH2 is being displayed as a moving image. It is a displayed effect. As the effect image EG2, specifically, an image representing smoke is displayed.

Character image still image data SD is previously stored in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the effect effect character CH2. A plurality of character still image data SD are provided so that the effect effect character CH2 can perform a predetermined motion during the effect effect execution period. As for the character still image data SD, as shown in FIG. 29B, the data for displaying the effect effect character CH2 as an individual image and the image by the character still image data SD are treated as a rectangular image. Data of the frame region FR1 set to surround the effect effect character CH2 in order to enable the above.

The image data for effect ED1 is previously stored in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the effect image EG2. A plurality of effect image data ED1 are provided so that the effect image EG2 can be changed in a predetermined manner during the effect effect execution period. As shown in FIG. 29C, the effect image data ED1 makes it possible to handle the data for displaying the effect image EG2 as an individual image and the image formed by the effect image data ED1 as a rectangular image. Therefore, the data of the frame region FR2 set so as to surround the periphery of the effect image EG2 is provided.

The character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 are formed to have the same size and the same shape at the initial setting. Further, since the pixels forming the effect effect character CH2 and the effect image EG2 are set to opaque or semi-transparent α values and are to be displayed on the display surface P, the frame regions FR1 and FR2 are formed. Since the pixel has a completely transparent α value, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

As described above, the frame areas 82a and 82b in which the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 are drawn include a large number of unit areas, and each unit area stores color information. Area is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29D, in each unit area 121, color information storage areas 121a to 121c each including one byte are set in one-to-one correspondence with each color of RGB. , RGB can be set to 256 colors.

As the value of the numerical value information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c is smaller, a color of a darker degree in RGB is finally displayed, and in the case of the minimum value, black is displayed. Further, as the value of the numerical information is larger, the color of the lighter degree in RGB is finally displayed, and in the case of the maximum value, white is displayed. It should be noted that the color information storage areas 121a to 121c need only be 1 byte in a configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors instead of the full color system.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29E, color information consisting of numerical information is set to each pixel 122 of the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 as well, using a color palette or the like. In each pixel 122, color information defining areas 122a to 122c each consisting of 1 byte are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each color of RGB, and 256 colors can be displayed in each of RGB.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set with 1 byte instead of 3 bytes, and in the configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors, each pixel 122 The color information defining areas 122a to 122c may also be configured with 1 byte.

In each pixel 122, an α value defining area 122d is set in addition to the color information defining areas 122a to 122c, and α value information is set. A storage capacity of 1 byte is ensured as the α value defining area 122d, but in actuality, numerical information of any one of “0 to 100” in decimal is set. Further, the α value information is numerical information of “0 to 100”, which corresponds to the α value of “0 to 1” and is treated as a value less than 1 in the calculation using the α value.

When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 of the drawing target, the numerical information obtained by multiplying the RGB numerical information in each pixel 122 by the α value is used for storing the color information in the unit area 121. The areas 121a to 121c are stored in areas corresponding to RGB. In this case, when an opaque α value (specifically, “1”) is set, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten in the corresponding unit area 121 as it is, and the completely transparent α value ( Specifically, when “0”) is set, the color information of the pixel 122 is not written in the corresponding unit area 121.

In the case of 0<α value<1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is executed with the image to be superimposed on the back side of the display surface P, and the calculation result is obtained for the unit area 121. Written. When the pixels having the 0<α value<1 in the character still image data SD are written in the unit area 121, the blending process is performed with the image to be superimposed on the back side of the display surface P. For details of the blending process, the color information already written in the unit area 121 is “r1, g1, b1”, and the color information next written in the unit area 121 is “r2, g2, b2”. When the α value set in association with the color information is α1,
R: r1×(1-α1)+r2×α1
G: g1×(1-α1)+g2×α1
B: b1×(1-α1)+b2×α1
Becomes

On the other hand, in the case of the effect image data ED1, 0<α value<1 is set as a semitransparent α value for all pixels for displaying the effect image EG2. Then, when the pixel is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, pixel addition processing for displaying the effect image EG2 is executed on each unit area 121 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. .. For details of the addition process, the color information already written in the unit area 121 is “r3, g3, b3”, and the color information of the effect image EG2 written in the unit area 121 is “r4, g4, b4”. If the α value set in association with the color information is α2,
R: r3+r4×α2
G: g3+g4×α2
B: b3+b4×α2
Becomes

By performing the addition process, the effect image EG2 corresponding to the effect image data ED1 reflects the color information and the degree of brightness of the effect effect character CH2 on which the effect image EG2 is superimposed. Is displayed. As described above, the effect image EG2 is an image through which the object on the back side, such as smoke, is made transparent. Therefore, if the effect image EG2 is displayed irrespective of the effect effect character CH2, a strange feeling occurs. On the other hand, by performing the addition process as described above, the effect image EG2 is displayed in a state in which the effect effect character CH2 is reflected, and the appearance is not caused without causing the discomfort. Will be preferred.

When the effect image EG2 is applied as described above, the addition process is executed. However, when the bright effect image EG2 is also overlaid on the bright image, the color is generated in the unit area 121 of the frame regions 82a and 82b. The information storage areas 121a to 121c have the maximum value, which may deviate from the designer's intention and cause white display (so-called whiteout). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect effect is executed while suppressing the occurrence of the overexposure.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the effect effect while suppressing the occurrence of blown-out highlights will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the arithmetic processing for effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for effect production is executed by the calculation processing for production of step S909 in the task processing (FIG. 19). Further, the calculation process for the effect effect is activated when the information about the effect effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

First, in step S1501, the character data to be displayed is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The character data includes character still image data SD, and the character still image data SD of a type corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is grasped as a display target. By the way, when the effect effect is executed, the effect effect character CH2 is displayed as a moving image as if the effect effect character CH2 is performing a predetermined motion over a plurality of frames in a situation where the effect image EG2 is not displayed, and then a moving image is displayed. A display in which the effect image EG2 is superimposed on the effect effect character CH2 is performed over a plurality of frames. In the following step S1502, the parameter information of the character still image data SD grasped in step S1501 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the character still image data SD. The information for control is updated by writing in the area.

In a succeeding step S1503, it is determined whether or not the effect image data ED1 should be applied based on the currently set execution target table. If it is necessary to apply the effect image data ED1, in step S1504, the effect image data ED1 of a type corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is grasped as a display target. In the following step S1505, the parameter information of the effect image data ED1 grasped in step S1504 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is stored in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to the effect image data ED1. The information for control is updated by writing. Then, in step S1506, effect generation designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the effect image data ED1 should be used is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

In a succeeding step S1507, whether or not it is the execution timing of the partial addition process which is a process for suppressing the occurrence of blown-out highlights when the effect image data ED1 is applied is determined based on the currently set execution target table. judge. If it is the execution timing of the partial addition processing, the partial addition designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the partial addition processing should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 in step S1508.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or the processing of step S1508 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, effect effect designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the effect effect should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

When the effect effect calculation processing is executed as described above, the character still image corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609). The data SD is set as the drawing target, and the effect image data ED1 is set as the drawing target in the period in which the effect image EG2 is displayed. Further, parameter information applied to the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 is set in the drawing list. Further, the effect production designation information is set in the drawing list, the effect generation designation information is set in the display period of the effect image EG2, and the partial addition designation information is further set in the execution timing of the partial addition process. Is set. It should be noted that at the start timing of the effect effect, the information on the address where the character still image data SD is stored in the memory module 74 and the information about the address where the effect image data ED1 is stored are specified in the drawing list. To be done.

Next, the setting process for effect effect and the writing process for effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The effect effect setting process is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23), and the effect effect writing process is the step of the drawing process (FIG. 23). This is executed as a part of the writing process executed in S1105. Further, when the effect effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the effect effect setting process and the effect effect writing process are executed. Here, in the drawing list, the effect effect designation information is set in association with the effect image data. Therefore, the effect effect setting process and the effect effect writing process are performed for the effect in the drawing list of this time. It is activated when the image data is drawn in the order.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the effect effect setting process.

In step S1601, the address of the area in which the still image data SD for the character to be drawn this time shown in the drawing list is read in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. At the start timing of the effect effect, the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 used in the effect effect are read from the memory module 74 and written in a predetermined area of the expansion buffer 81. In the following step S1602, the parameter information applied to the still image data SD for the character to be drawn this time is grasped.

When the effect generation designation information is set in the drawing list (step S1603: YES), the effect image data ED1 of the current drawing target shown in the drawing list is the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S1604. Understand the address of the area being read in. Then, in step S1605, the parameter information applied to the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is grasped.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the writing process for effect effect.

First, the still image data SD for the character to be drawn this time is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. This drawing is performed based on the coordinates specified in the drawing list in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b (step S1701).

When the effect generation designation information is set in the drawing list (step S1702: YES), the process for applying the effect image data ED1 is executed in steps S1703 to S1712. Specifically, first, in step S1703, a value corresponding to the total number of pixels in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is set in the write processing counter provided in the register 92. Then, in step S1704, it is determined whether partial addition designation information is set in the drawing list. If the partial addition designation information is set, the setting process for partial addition shown in steps S1705 to S1708 is executed, and then the addition process shown in steps S1709 to S1711 is executed. If the partial addition designation information is not set, the addition process is executed without executing the setting process for partial addition.

A case where the addition process is executed without executing the setting process for partial addition will be described. First, in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time, the RGB color information set in the pixel corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter and the α value are integrated (step S1709). Then, the color information of the integration result is added to each color information of RGB stored in the dot corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1710). Then, the value of the write processing counter is decremented by 1 (step S1711). As a result, the integrated result of the color information and the α value set in the corresponding pixel of the effect image data ED1 is added to the color information set in the pixel of the character still image data SD as it is. ..

A case where the addition process is executed after the setting process for partial addition is executed will be described. In the setting process for partial addition, first, the RGB color information set in the pixel corresponding to the current value of the write process counter in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is read (step S1705). Then, the read color information is inverted (step S1706). At the time of this inversion, the read color information is subtracted from “255” which is the maximum value of the color information for each of RGB. The value of the inverted result, that is, the value of the result of subtracting the read color information from "255" is divided by "255" which is the maximum value of the color information (step S1707). After that, the value of the division result is integrated with each color information of RGB stored in the dot corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1708).

In this case, since the division result is “1” for the pixel for which “0” is set as the color information in the effect image data ED1, the division result is integrated in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b. The dot color information does not change. On the other hand, with respect to the pixel for which a value of 1 or more is set as the color information in the effect image data ED1, the division result is a value less than 1. In the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the color information of the dots in which the division result of the value less than 1 is integrated becomes a value smaller than the initially set value.

Then, in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time, the RGB color information set in the pixel corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter and the α value are integrated (step S1709). Then, the color information of the integration result is added to each color information of RGB stored in the dot corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1710). After that, in step S1711, the value of the write processing counter is decremented by 1, and in step S1712, it is determined whether or not the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is “0”. When it is not "0", the writing process of the pixel corresponding to the value of the writing process counter after subtraction is executed, and when it is "0", the writing process for this effect effect is finished as it is. ..

By performing the setting process for partial addition as described above, the color information of the character still image data SD already drawn in each unit area 121 of the frame regions 82a and 82b is reduced to a small value. As a result, it is possible to reduce the value of the color information of the unit area 121 to which the effect image data ED1 is added before the addition processing is performed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

Since this reduction is performed by integrating the value obtained by inverting the respective color information of the effect image data ED1 by dividing the value by the maximum value of the color information, in each unit area 121 of the frame regions 82a and 82b, The unit area 121 in which the color information of the applied effect image data ED1 is large has a large reduction in color information (that is, a small value is integrated). As a result, the advance reduction amount of the color information becomes larger in the unit area 121 to which the pixel of the large color information is applied in the effect image data ED1, and the color information of the unit area 121 in which the possibility of the whiteout is high is emphasized. Can be reduced in advance. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the reduction amount of the color information set by the character still image data SD for the unit area 121 in which the possibility of overexposure is low, and the display content of the effect effect character CH2 is maintained as much as possible. It becomes possible.

The reduction of the color information according to the content of the color information of the effect image data ED1 is performed by using the effect image data ED1. As a result, as compared with the configuration in which the image data for partial addition different from the effect image data ED1 is stored in advance in the memory module 74, the data necessary for storing the image data in the memory module 74 is stored. It is possible to reduce the capacity.

<Another form of configuration related to effect production>
In place of the configuration in which the color information is reduced by using the effect image data ED1, reduction data different from the effect image data ED1 is stored in the memory module 74 in advance, and the reduction data is stored. The color information may be reduced by applying it to the character still image data SD. In this case, the reduction data is reduced by a smaller amount in a portion of the effect image data ED1 to which data corresponding to relatively bright color information is applied than in a portion to which data corresponding to relatively dark color information is applied. By setting so as to be large, it is possible to reduce the color information in a mode according to the data content of the effect image data ED1 as in the above embodiment.

In the color information set by the character still image data SD, the color information is reduced at a portion of the effect image data ED1 where the color information of a predetermined value or more is set, while the character still image data SD is reduced. With respect to the color information set by the above, the color information may not be reduced in a portion of the effect image data ED1 where the color information of a predetermined numerical value or more is not set.

In the still image data SD for characters, the color information of the pixel for which the completely transparent α value (specifically “0”) in the effect image data ED1 is set is the color information. The configuration may not be reduced. In this case, even if the addition processing of the effect image data ED1 is performed, it is possible to exclude from the target for which the color information is to be reduced, without causing overexposure, and to display the image with the content that should be displayed originally. Is possible.

The target for reducing the color information in correspondence with the color information of each pixel set in the effect image data ED1 is not limited to the color information set by the character still image data SD, and the character information is not limited to the color information set by the character still image data SD. Both the color information set by the still image data SD for characters and the color information set by the effect image data ED1 may be used, and the color information set by the still image data SD for characters is reduced. Instead, only the color information set in the effect image data ED1 may be reduced.

The color information set by the character still image data SD may be reduced in correspondence with the color information set by the character still image data SD, and the color set by the character still image data SD may be used. The color information set in the effect image data ED1 may be reduced corresponding to the information.

<Structure for development development>
Next, a configuration for performing development effect will be described with reference to FIG. 33(a) to 33(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the development effect.

The development effect means that the type of effect image applied changes as the effect progresses, and the type of effect image increases so that the overall effect image content becomes progressively flashy. It is a production. Specifically, in the first stage effect period in the development effect, as shown in FIG. 33A, the first effect image EG3 in which the light beam is emitted from the center toward the outside is displayed as a moving image, and the first effect image EG3 in the development effect is displayed. In the two-stage effect period, a second effect image EG4 in which particles move from the center to the outside is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 33B, and in the third-stage effect period in the development effect, As shown in FIG. 33(c), a moving image is displayed in a state where both the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are superimposed, and as shown in FIG. 33(d) during the fourth stage effect period in the development effect. In addition to the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4, the third effect image EG5 in which the ring of light spreads outward from the center side is displayed as a moving image.

The development effect is executed as an effect for game use, and the higher the degree of expectation of the reach display or the greater result of the jackpot result, the higher the degree of progress toward the rear side. That is, in the case of ending only in the first stage, in the case of executing and ending in the second stage after the first stage, in the case of executing and ending in the third stage after the first to second stages, and the first Each of the steps from the third step to the fourth step that is executed and ended is set as an execution pattern of the development effect, and the above-mentioned degree of expectation is one when the development effect of the execution pattern on the rear side is executed. Becomes higher.

In the development effect, the display contents of the effect images EG3 to EG5 are changed in multiple stages as described above, but the effects stored in advance in the memory module 74 to display the effect images EG3 to EG5 in the development effect. The number of use image data ED2 to ED4 is smaller than the number of stages of development effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(e), the memory module 74 combines the first effect image data ED2, the second effect image data ED3, as image data for executing the development effect. The effect image data ED4 is stored in advance.

The first effect image data ED2 is image data for displaying only the first effect image EG3 among the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the first effect image EG3 is predetermined in the effect period of the first stage. A plurality of them are provided so that they can be changed in the above manner. The first effect image data ED2 is the first data for displaying the first effect image EG3 as an individual image and the first effect image data ED2 so that the image by the first effect image data ED2 can be treated as a rectangular image. Data of a frame area set so as to surround the periphery of the effect image EG3. The pixels forming the first effect image EG3 are displayed on the display surface P because the translucent α value (0<α value<1) is set, but the pixels forming the frame area are completely Since the transparent α value is set, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

The second effect image data ED3 is image data for displaying only the second effect image EG4 among the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the second effect image EG4 is predetermined in the effect period of the second stage. A plurality of them are provided so that they can be changed in the above manner. The second effect image data ED3 is data for displaying the second effect image EG4 as an individual image and the second effect image data ED3 in order to enable the image by the second effect image data ED3 to be treated as a rectangular image. Data of a frame area set so as to surround the periphery of the effect image EG4. The pixels forming the second effect image EG4 are displayed on the display surface P because the translucent α value (0<α value<1) is set, but the pixels forming the frame area are completely Since the transparent α value is set, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

The composite effect image data ED4 is image data for displaying all of the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG4 in the effect period of the fourth stage. A plurality of effect images EG5 are provided so that they can be changed in a predetermined manner. The composite effect image data ED4 is data for displaying the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 as individual images, and the image by the composite effect image data ED4 is a rectangular image. In order to make it possible to handle, it is provided with data of a frame area set to surround the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5. Since the pixels forming the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 are set to the translucent α value (0<α value<1), they are to be displayed on the display surface P. However, since the pixels forming the frame area have the completely transparent α value, they are not displayed on the display surface P.

Here, as the image data for displaying each effect image EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, only the first effect image data ED2, the second effect image data ED3, and the combined effect image data ED4 are stored in advance. In, the effect image data corresponding to the stage 3 stage effect does not exist. On the other hand, in the third stage effect period, by using both the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3, the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are generated. A movie is displayed with both superimposed.

The manner in which the development effect is executed by using each of the effect image data ED2 to ED4 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 34A shows the period of use of the first effect image data ED2, FIG. 34B shows the period of use of the second effect image data ED3, and FIG. 34C shows the combined effect image data ED4. Indicates the usage period of.

In the first stage effect period that is executed from the timing t1 to the second timing, the first effect image data ED2 is used and the second effect image data ED3 and The image data ED4 for the composite effect is not used. In the second stage effect period executed from the timing t2 to the third timing, the second effect image data ED3 is used as shown in FIG. 34B, and the first effect image data ED2 and The image data ED4 for the composite effect is not used.

In the third stage effect period executed from the timing t3 to the fourth timing, as shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image Both of the data ED3 are used, and the image data ED4 for composite effect is not used. In the fourth stage effect period executed from the timing t4 to the fifth timing, the composite effect image data ED4 is used as shown in FIG. 34C, and the first effect image data ED2 and the The image data ED3 for 2 effects is not used.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the development effect will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for development effect executed by the display CPU 72. The arithmetic operation for development effect is executed by the arithmetic operation for effect in step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). The arithmetic processing for the development effect is started when the information about the development effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the start timing of the development effect (step S1801: YES), each address of the first effect image data ED2, the second effect image data ED3, and the combined effect image data ED4 in the memory module 74 is grasped ( Step S1802). Then, in step S1803, the development effect start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the development effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

If it is the first stage effect period (step S1804: YES), the first effect image data ED2 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1805). .. In addition, the parameter information of the first effect image data ED2 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with the first effect image data ED2 for control. Information is updated (step S1806). After that, in step S1807, the first stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the first stage production period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

If it is the second stage production period (step S1808: YES), the second effect image data ED3 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1809). .. In addition, the parameter information of the second effect image data ED3 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the second effect image data ED3 for control. Information is updated (step S1810). After that, in step S1811, the second stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the second stage production period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

If the effect period is the third stage (step S1812: YES), the first effect image data ED2 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1813). ), The second effect image data ED3 of the type corresponding to the update timing of this time is grasped (step S1814). Also, the parameter information of the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is stored in the work RAM 73 as the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the data ED3 (step S1815). After that, in step S1816, the third stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the third stage effect period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

If it is not the third stage effect period (step S1812: NO), it means that it is the fourth stage effect period, and therefore the process proceeds to step S1817. In step S1817, based on the currently set execution target table, the composite effect image data ED4 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. Further, the control information is obtained by calculating and deriving the parameter information of the composite effect image data ED4, and writing the derived parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with the composite effect image data ED4. Is updated (step S1818). After that, in step S1819, the fourth stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the fourth stage production period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

When the arithmetic processing for development effect is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609), the effect image data corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is included. ED2 to ED4 are set as drawing targets. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information applied to the effect image data ED2 to ED4 to be drawn is set. Further, any one of the first stage designation information, the second stage designation information, the third stage designation information, and the fourth stage designation information is set in the drawing list in correspondence with the current rendering period, and further development rendering is started. At the timing, development effect start designation information is set.

Next, the development effect setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for the development effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23). Further, when any of the first to fourth stage designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for development effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the first to fourth effect designation information is set in association with the image data for effect, the setting process for development effect is the image data for effect in the current drawing list. It is activated when the drawing order of is reached.

When the development effect start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S1901: YES), each first effect image data ED2 is stored in the memory module 74 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The stored address, the address where each second effect image data ED3 is stored, and the address where each combined effect image data ED4 is stored are grasped, and the effect image is outputted from the memory module 74 based on the grasped result. All the data ED2 to ED4 are read to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S1902).

If the first-stage designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S1903: YES), in step S1904, the current first effect image data ED2 shown in the drawing list is used for expanding the VRAM 75. The address of the area read in the buffer 81 is grasped. In the following step S1905, the parameter information applied to the image data ED2 for the first effect this time is grasped.

If the second-stage designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S1906: YES), the image data ED3 for the second effect this time shown in the drawing list is used for expanding the VRAM 75 in step S1907. The address of the area read in the buffer 81 is grasped. In the following step S1908, the parameter information applied to the second effect image data ED3 of this time is grasped.

When the third stage designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S1909: YES), in step S1910, the current first effect image data ED2 shown in the drawing list is used for expanding the VRAM 75. The address of the area read out in the buffer 81 is grasped, and the second effect image data ED3 of this time shown in the drawing list is read out in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S1911. Know the address of the area you are in. In a succeeding step S1912, parameter information applied to the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 of this time is grasped.

When the first to third stage designation information is not set in the drawing list this time (step S1909: NO), it means that it is the fourth stage production period, and therefore the process proceeds to step S1913. In step S1913, the address of the area in which the image data ED4 for the current combination effect shown in the drawing list is read in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. In the following step S1914, the parameter information applied to the image data ED4 for the current combination effect is grasped.

By executing the setting process for the development effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S1105), the effect image data ED2 to ED4 to be rendered provide the parameter information to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be rendered. It is drawn in the applied state.

In the third stage effect period in which both the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are displayed in a moving image in a superimposed state, the combined effect image data in which both effect images EG3 and EG4 are collectively set is displayed. Rather than preparing in advance, the first effect image data ED2 to be drawn in the first stage effect period and the second effect image data ED3 to be drawn in the second stage effect period are used. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity required to store the effect image data in advance. On the other hand, for the fourth stage effect period in which the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 are simultaneously displayed, a combined effect in which those effect images EG3 to EG5 are collectively set Image data ED4 is prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with the configuration in which the effect images EG3 to EG5 are simultaneously displayed using the three types of effect image data. That is, according to the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect of gradually increasing the number of types of effect images EG3 to EG5 while balancing the storage capacity of the memory module 74 and the processing load.

<Another form of structure related to development production>
The effect image data for displaying the third effect image EG5 may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, each of the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 can be individually displayed in different display periods, and one combined effect image data ED4 is used. The first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 can be displayed simultaneously. Further, in this configuration, it is possible to display an image of any two combinations of the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5.

<Structure for performing simultaneous display performance>
Next, a configuration for performing the simultaneous display effect will be described.

As shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 37(a), the simultaneous display effect is a timing at which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed at the same time increases and the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 further increases. Is an effect in which the display of the effect image for increase EG6 is started. The increasing effect image EG6 is an image in which waves propagate from the center toward the outside. The increase effect image EG6 is displayed so as to change in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period from the timing when the number of the effect characters CH3 to CH7 simultaneously increases to the update timing of the plurality of frames.

As image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6, the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are prestored in the memory module 74 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 37(b). ing. The normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are both image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6, but the simple effect image data ED6 is more than the normal effect image data ED5. The difference is that the number of pixels is small. Since the normal effect image data ED5 has the same number of pixels as the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7, the simple effect image data ED6 displays the effect characters CH3 to CH7. It can be said that the number of pixels is smaller than the image data of.

Regarding the number of pixels, specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37(c-1) and 37(c-2), the number of pixels of the simple effect image data ED6 is half that of the normal effect image data ED5. There is. Therefore, in order to display the increase effect image EG6 in the same size, when the simple effect image data ED6 is the drawing target, the scale is larger than when the normal effect image data ED5 is the drawing target. Information needs to be doubled.

While only one simple effect image data ED6 is provided, the normal effect image data ED5 changes the increasing effect image EG6 in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period over the update timing of a plurality of frames. A plurality is provided so that it is possible. When the increase effect image EG6 is displayed, as will be described later in detail, the simple effect image data ED6 is used first, and then the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 is used. In this case, the increase-time effect image displayed by the simple effect image data ED6 so that the increase-time effect image EG6 can be changed in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period over the update timings of a plurality of frames. In contrast to the display mode of EG6, the display mode of the effect image for increase EG6 displayed by the normal effect image data ED5 whose use order is first among the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 has continuity. ..

The normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 and the images of the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 as rectangular images. In order to enable the handling, it is provided with data of a frame area set so as to surround the increase effect image EG6. The pixels forming the effect image EG6 for increase have a semi-transparent α value (0<α value<1) and are therefore displayed on the display surface P, but the pixels forming the frame area do not. Since the completely transparent α value is set, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

The manner in which the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are selectively used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 38A shows a minority display period in which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed simultaneously is small, and FIG. 38B shows a period in which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 simultaneously displayed is large. 38C shows a period in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6, and FIG. 38D shows an increasing period. The period during which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for use is shown.

As shown in FIG. 38A, the minority display period is provided from the timing t1 to the timing t2. In the minority display period, as shown in FIG. 38(A), there are only two effect characters CH3, CH4 displayed on the display surface P.

When the minority display period ends at the timing of t2, the majority display period starts as shown in FIG. 38(b). At the timing when the multiple display period is started, the number of the effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed on the display surface P is increased to five as shown in FIG. 38(B), and the increase effect image EG6 is displayed. Is started. In this case, at the timing t2 which is the start timing of the multiple display period, the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 as shown in FIG. 38(c). .. As a result, in the configuration in which a plurality of image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 are read at the start timing of the multiple display period, the time required for reading the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is shortened. Be promoted. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the image data reading period at the start timing of the multiple display period, and increase the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed and display the increase effect image EG6 at the start timing of the multiple display period. Both the start and the start can be suitably performed. Further, according to this configuration, it is necessary to read the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 at a timing before the multiple display period is started. There is no need to set a program for pre-transfer.

The state in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 is continued over the update timing of a plurality of frames. Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 is changed from the simple effect image data ED6 to the normal effect image data ED5 as shown in FIGS. 38(c) and 38(d). Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to improve the image quality of the increasing effect image EG6 compared to the period in which the simple effect image data ED6 has been used. After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 38B and 38D, the multiple display period ends and the increase effect image EG6 using the normal effect image data ED5 ends.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the simultaneous display effect will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for simultaneous display effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for simultaneous display effect is executed by the effect calculation processing in step S909 in the task processing (FIG. 19). The calculation process for the simultaneous display effect is started when the information about the simultaneous display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is the minority display period (step S2001: YES), it is determined in step S2002 whether it is the start timing of the minority display period. When it is the start timing of the minority display period (step S2002: YES), each address in the memory module 74 of the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 and CH4 to be displayed in the minority display period is grasped (step S2003). ). Then, in step S2004, the minority display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the minority display period of the simultaneous display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

When a negative determination is made in step S2002 or when the process of step S2004 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the update timing of this time is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2005). Also, the control information is updated by calculating and deriving the parameter information of the image data, and writing the derived parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with the image data (step S2006). .. After that, in step S2007, the minority display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the minority display period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

If it is the multiple display period (step S2001: NO), it is determined in step S2008 whether it is the start timing of the multiple display period. When it is the start timing of the multiple display period (step S2008: YES), the memory module of the image data for displaying the effect characters CH5, CH6, CH7 whose display is started in the multiple display period and the image data ED6 for the simple effect. Each address in 74 is grasped (step S2009). Then, in step S2010, the multiple display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the multiple display period of the simultaneous display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

In the case of the multiple display period and the simple display period (step S2001: NO, step S2011: YES), the image data of the type corresponding to the update timing of this time is displayed based on the currently set execution target table. Understand (step S2012). In this case, the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed in the multiple display period and the simple effect image data ED6 are grasped. Also, the control information is updated by calculating and deriving the parameter information of these image data and writing the derived parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with these image data (step S2013). .. After that, in step S2014, the display CPU 72 displays the simple display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the simple display period in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6. Store in register.

On the other hand, if it is not the simple display period, that is, if it is the normal display period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 (step S2011: NO), in step S2015. It is determined whether it is the start timing of the normal display period. If it is the start timing of the normal display period (step S2015: YES), the addresses in the memory module 74 for all of the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 are grasped (step S2016). Then, in step S2017, the normal display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the normal display period should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

In the case of the multiple display period and the normal display period (step S2001: NO, step S2011: NO), based on the currently set execution target table, the image data of the type corresponding to the update timing of this time is displayed. Understand (step S2018). In this case, the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed in the multiple display period and the normal effect image data ED5 are grasped. Also, the control information is updated by calculating and deriving the parameter information of these image data and writing the derived parameter information in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with these image data (step S2019). .. Thereafter, in step S2020, the normal display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the normal display period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 is displayed by the display CPU 72. Store in register.

When the calculation processing for simultaneous display effect is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609), the effect character corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is displayed. Image data for displaying CH3 to CH7 is set as a drawing target. Further, in the multiple display period, either the simple effect image data ED6 or the normal effect image data ED5 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this case, for the normal effect image data ED6, the normal effect image data ED6 of the type corresponding to the corresponding update timing is set as the drawing target. Also, parameter information applied to the image data to be drawn is set in the drawing list. Further, in the drawing list, any one of the minority display designation information, the simple display designation information and the normal display designation information is set in correspondence with the current presentation period, and further, the minority display start designation information is set at the start timing of each display period. One of the multiple display start designation information and the normal display start designation information is set.

Next, the setting process for the simultaneous display effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for the simultaneous display effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23). Further, when any one of the small number display designation information, the simple display designation information and the normal display designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the simultaneous display effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, the minority display designation information, the simple display designation information, and the normal display designation information are set in association with the image data for effect, so the setting process for simultaneous display effect is the same as that of the current drawing list. Of these, it is activated when the rendering order of the image data for rendering is reached.

When the minority display designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S2101: YES), it is determined in step S2102 whether the minority display start designation information is further set in the drawing list. When the minority display start designation information is set (step S2102: YES), from the information of the addresses set in the drawing list, the production characters CH3 and CH4 to be displayed in the minority display period in the memory module 74. The address of the area in which the image data for displaying is stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, all of these image data are read from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2103).

If the small number display designation information is set (step S2101: YES), the area in which the current image data shown in the drawing list is read in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S2104. Figure out the address of. In the following step S2105, the parameter information applied to the image data of this time is grasped.

When multiple display start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S2106: YES), display is started in the multiple display period in the memory module 74 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area in which the image data for displaying the effect characters CH5, CH6, CH7 is stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, all of these image data are read from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. (Step S2107).

Further, the address of the area where the simple effect image data ED6 is stored in the memory module 74 is grasped from the information of the address set in the drawing list this time, and based on the grasped result, the memory module 74 is used for the simple effect. The image data ED6 is read into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2108). Then, in step S2109, enlargement processing of the read-out simple effect image data ED6 is executed. In the enlargement processing, the number of pixels is increased while executing the interpolation processing of the color information for the simple effect image data ED6, so that the number of pixels becomes the same as the number of pixels of the normal effect image data ED5. The effect image data is created and written in the expansion buffer 81.

Here, the processing time required for the enlargement processing is the time required to read one normal effect image data ED5 from the memory module 74 and the one simple effect image data ED6 read from the memory module 74. The time is shorter than the time difference from the required time. As a result, even if the enlargement processing is executed for the simple effect image data ED6, the processing time is shortened as compared with the case where the normal effect image data ED5 is read at the start timing of the multiple display period. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, if the normal display start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S2110: YES), the normal effect image data ED5 is stored in the memory module 74 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The stored address is grasped, and based on the grasped result, all of the normal effect image data ED5 is read from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2111).

If the simple display designation information or the normal display designation information is set in the drawing list of this time, the image data of this time shown in the drawing list is read in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S2112. Know the address of the area you are in. In this case, in the simple display period, the address of the area in the expansion buffer 81 where the effect image data after the enlargement processing is written is grasped. On the other hand, in the normal display period, the address of the area where the normal effect image data ED5 corresponding to the update timing of this time is read in the expansion buffer 81 is grasped. In subsequent step S2113, parameter information applied to the image data of this time is grasped.

By performing the setting process for the simultaneous display effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S1105), the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be drawn are displayed in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. Image data is drawn with the parameter information applied. Further, during the simple display period, the image data for effect after enlargement processing is drawn as the image data for displaying the effect image for increase EG6 with the parameter information applied, and during the normal display period, the image data for increase is used. The normal effect image data ED5 for displaying the effect image EG6 is drawn with the parameter information applied.

At the start timing of the multiple display period, the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6. As a result, in the configuration in which a plurality of image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 are read at the start timing of the multiple display period, the time required for reading the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is shortened. Be promoted. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the image data reading period at the start timing of the multiple display period, and increase the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed and display the increase effect image EG6 at the start timing of the multiple display period. Both the start and the start can be suitably performed. Further, according to this configuration, it is necessary to read the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 at a timing before the multiple display period is started. There is no need to set a program for pre-transfer.

The image data in which the number of pixels is set to be small in order to reduce the time required to read the image data is not the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7, but the effect image EG6 for increase is displayed. Image data. As a result, it is possible to preferably display the image at the start timing of the multiple display period while preventing the image quality of the effect characters CH3 to CH7 that are conspicuous as the image display from being deteriorated.

The image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 is changed from the simple effect image data ED6 to the normal effect image data ED5 when the multiple display period has progressed to some extent. As a result, the image quality of the increasing effect image EG6 can be made suitable from the middle of the multiple display period.

Enlargement processing is executed at the timing of reading the simple effect image data ED6, and during the subsequent simple display period, the effect image data after the enlargement processing is used. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the enlargement processing is executed every time during the simple display period.

<Another form of configuration related to simultaneous display performance>
The simple effect image data ED6 may be provided as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, but the normal effect image data ED5 may not be provided. Even in this case, it is possible to display the increasing effect image ED6 while shortening the time required to read the image data at the start timing of the multiple display period. In this configuration, the enlarging process is executed so that the simple effect image data ED6 has the same resolution as the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7.

The image data ED6 for the simple effect is set to half the resolution of the image data ED5 for the normal effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image data ED6 may be set to a resolution of 1/4. The resolution may be set to ⅓, or the resolution may be set to ⅔.

The simple effect image data ED6 may have a period during which the image data ED6 is enlarged and used, and a period during which the resolution stored in the memory module 74 is used as it is. For example, when the effect image for increase EG6 is displayed using the entire display surface P, the simple effect image data ED6 is enlarged and used, and a part of the display surface P is set to be partitioned. When the increasing effect image EG6 is displayed within the range of the divided area, the simple effect image data ED6 may be used with the same resolution.

-Instead of providing only one simple effect image data ED6, a plurality of simple effect image data ED6 may be provided. Accordingly, even when the effect image for increase EG6 is displayed using the image data for simple effect ED6, it is possible to change the display mode of the effect image for increase EG6. In the configuration, all the simple effect image data ED6 are not collectively read at the timing of starting to display the increase effect image EG6 using the simple effect image data ED6, but are used at each update timing. It is preferable that the target simple effect image data ED6 be individually read, and that the read-out simple effect image data ED6 be subjected to enlargement processing (step S2109).

<Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the electrical configuration regarding display control is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this embodiment.

The configuration shown in FIG. 41 includes a main controller 50 as in the first embodiment. Further, the main control device 50 has a payout control device 55 for controlling the payout device 56, a power supply function for supplying power to each device including the main control device 50, and a power supply for driving and controlling the game ball launching mechanism 58. The firing control device 57, the special figure unit 37 for displaying the result of the game times, and the general figure unit 38 for displaying the result of the general electric open lottery are electrically connected. Further, a voice light emission control device 60 that drives and controls the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 is provided, and the command transmitted from the voice light emission control device 60 is further added. A display control device 130 for controlling the symbol display device 41 on the basis is provided.

As shown in FIG. 41, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. In detail, the display CPU 131 is connected to an input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 via the input port 137. To be done.

The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via the bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60, a drawing instruction for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a three-dimensional image (3D image). To do. The memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described below.

The memory module 133 is a storage unit that stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 133 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 133 includes object data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, texture data attached to the object data, and the backmost image in one frame image. And image data for the back surface that constitutes the image of FIG.

Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of three-dimensional coordinate vertices. In order to apply, for example, a surface model to the object data, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with the reference coordinates preset for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, the direction and the size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

The texture data is an image to be attached to each polygon of the object data, and by attaching the texture data to the object data, an image corresponding to the object data, for example, a display image including a pattern or a character is generated. Although the texture data may be held in any manner, for example, it includes at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette referred to when determining a display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

The image on the bottommost surface constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The method of holding the image data for the back surface is arbitrary, but for example, it is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which two-dimensional still image data is compressed. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate-shaped object data (that is, plate polygon) is used.

The work RAM 132 is a storage unit for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 133 and transferred, and also temporarily storing a flag and the like. The work RAM 132 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in particular, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. The work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Based on the data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133, the control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 134 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 134 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is well executed. Further, the VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 134 includes a development buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 135 to the memory module 133. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135.

The VDP 135 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the development buffer 141 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 135 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing a drawing-specific firmware.

More specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, and a display circuit 155. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 and the I/F 157 for the VRAM 134.

The I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 stores the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131 in the register 153. The geometry calculation unit 151 reads various image data stored in the memory module 133 into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. In addition, the geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object data designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processing when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Then, finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

The rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and pastes the texture data to each clipped object data based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, and determines the appearance of the object data. In addition, the rendering unit 152 projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and performs various adjustments based on the depth information to frame one-frame drawing data that is two-dimensional data. Create in the buffer 142. The drawing data for one frame means the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

Note that all the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list. A memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are included. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute processing depending on the contents of the above. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 133. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute the process only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of the frame areas 142a and 142b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The storage capacity is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 142 is provided with the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b, the drawing data created in one of the frame areas is used to draw on the symbol display device 41. The drawing data to be used in the future is created for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is displayed in the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 138. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 142a and 142b to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 41 and converted into gradation data. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data. The display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal.

<Basic processing in display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described. The display CPU 131 executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. The contents of the command interruption process are the same as those in the first embodiment. The contents of the V interrupt process are the same as the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment except for the task process of step S608.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing task processing in this embodiment.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the delay flag provided in the work RAM 132. When "1" is not set in the delay flag (step S2201: NO), a control start setting process is executed in step S2202. In the control start setting process, a process for setting an individual image for which control is newly started in the display CPU 131 in the current processing cycle is executed. In the present embodiment, the individual image means one 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back side, or one 3D image defined by a combination of object data and texture data. is there.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for control start, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in this processing time. If it exists, it searches the work RAM 132 for a free buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and makes a one-to-one correspondence with the individual image grasped as the control start target. To secure a free buffer area. Further, the initialization processing is executed for all the secured free buffer areas, and the parameter information for starting the control corresponding to the individual image is set in the initialized free buffer areas.

In a succeeding step S2202, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in one frame of images after the current processing.

After that, in step S2204, new activation of the V interrupt processing is permitted, and in step S2205 immediately after that, new activation of the V interrupt processing is prohibited, and then the background arithmetic processing is executed (step S2206). In the background calculation process, for the background image that forms the background image and the background character, the coordinates in the world coordinate system, the rotation angle, the scale, the light information for adding the contrast, and the projection A process of calculating and deriving various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information for performing and a Z test designation is executed.

After that, in step S2207, a new activation of the V interruption process is permitted, and in the next step S2208, a new activation of the V interruption process is prohibited, and then a production calculation process is executed (step S2209). In the production calculation process, a process for calculating and deriving the various parameter information described above is performed with respect to individual images to be displayed in various productions such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot production.

After that, new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S2210, and new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in step S2211 immediately after that, and then symbol calculation processing is executed (step S2212). In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameter information with respect to the image of the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner in each game is executed.

By the way, in each process of step S2206, step S2209, and step S2212, a process of updating the control start parameter information set in step S2201 is executed. In addition, in each processing of step S2206, step S2209, and step S2212, animation data set so as to change various parameter information of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing comes. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in the memory module 133 in advance. Further, in the symbol calculation process, when the execution target table for fraudulent notification or status notification is read to the work RAM 132, the calculation process for displaying the notification image corresponding to the execution target table is executed. A notification sprite for displaying the notification image and various parameter information applied to the notification sprite are derived.

After that, in step S2213, "1" is set to the calculation completion flag provided in the work RAM 132, and in step S2214, the process of recognizing the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed, and then this task process is ended. .. In the process of recognizing the placement target in the world coordinate system, among the individual images that have been subject to control update by the processes of step S2206, step S2209, and step S2212, the individual image set as the rendering target in the rendering list this time is selected. Perform the process of grasping. The grasp is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

In other words, the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 is set to be larger than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, so that adjustment is performed in step S2214. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 135 may be the same, and in this case, the process of step S2214 is executed. There is no need.

On the other hand, if the delay flag is set to "1" (step S2201: YES), the delay flag is cleared to "0" in step S2215, and then a new processing time of the V interrupt process is performed in the previous task process. Jumps to the process that was being executed immediately before (step S2216). As a result, it becomes possible to resume the execution of the processing from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous task processing. The contents of the delay flag and the operation completion flag are the same as those in the first embodiment, and in task processing, step S2201, step S2204 to step S2205, step S2207 to step S2208, step S2210 to step S2211, step S2213 are performed. The operation and effect obtained by executing steps S2215 to S2216 are also the same as those in the first embodiment.

<Basic processing in VDP135>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

In the VDP 135, a process of setting the value of the register 153 based on a command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I/F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) by the cooperation of the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. The process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined image signal output start timing.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. 43A to 43C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of the target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created, is set for the image of one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, various designation information is set in the header information.

In the drawing list, in addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system at the time of creating the drawing data this time are set, and further information on the drawing order of each image data, The parameter information of each image data is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be serially-numbered numerical information, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

In the drawing list of FIG. 43A, the back image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for effect is set as the order after the image data for background, for example, the effect object A is set as the m-th, the effect object B is set as the m+1-th, and so on. There is. Further, as the order after the image data for these effects, the image data for symbols is set, for example, the object A for symbols is set as the nth, the object for symbols B is set as the n+1th, and so on. There is.

The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above order, and the set order may be the reverse of the above order. Image data for production or image data for background may be set after the data, and image data for symbols is set in the order between predetermined image data for production and image data for other production. It may have been done.

Parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3),..., P(m), P(m+1),..., P(n), P(n+1),. , Multiple types of parameter information are set. Regarding the parameter information P(1) of the image data for the back side, specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(b), information on the address of the area where the image data for the back side is stored in the memory module 133, and Information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) of coordinates indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the image data for the back, and world coordinates when setting the image data for the back surface Rotation angle information that indicates the rotation angle in the system, scale information that indicates the magnification when setting the world coordinate system for the scale that is set as the initial state of the back image data, and the back information Information of a uniform α value indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) when setting image data is set.

Here, the coordinate information is set individually for all the vertices of the object data. The information on the coordinates is set for the object data but not for the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to the combination of the object data and the texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 when performing texture mapping.

In the parameter information (P1), camera information including coordinate and orientation information of the virtual camera when the back image data is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for rendering, and the back image data are rendered. Light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shade in the case is set.

In the parameter information (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is applied is set. The Z buffer method is each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z axis when many objects or two-dimensional images are overlapped in the depth direction (Z axis direction) in the world coordinate system. Is sequentially referred to the distance from the viewpoint, and the numerical information set to the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set to the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 142a and 142b.

In addition to the Z buffer method, a Z sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment that sequentially sets, for each pixel arranged on the Z axis, the numerical information set for each pixel in the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b. When the Z sorting method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In such a state, the addition processing of these numerical information and the calculation processing for fusion are executed. Although a description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, it is activated when the effect image is displayed.

In the parameter information (P1), α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, and fog designation information indicating whether fog is applied and an application target are set.

Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying the α data. The uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data and texture data, and is stored in the memory module 133 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

Since the α value and the α data are uniformly set as described above, the transparency of the two-dimensional still image data and the texture data is not finely controlled in pixel units, but is uniformly controlled for all pixels. It is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to deal with a uniform α value in a sufficient situation, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying α data.

The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, the Z-axis direction. Fog is used to represent fog and the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a fixed manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object arranged on the back side in the Z-axis direction, a different fog is set for the object in a situation in which the texture is not obtained due to being too dark. It is good to have a configuration. As a result, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while not impairing the texture.

For other parameters such as the parameter information P(2), as shown in FIG. 43(c), instead of the information of the image data for the back surface among the various information of FIG. 43(b), the information of the object and the texture are used. Information and are set. As these pieces of information, information on addresses of areas in which objects and textures are stored in the memory module 133 is set.

Drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the following description, how the drawing data is created as the drawing process is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 131. If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed in step S2302.

In the setting process for the background, out of the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and the object data for displaying the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for arrangement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. After that, the memory module 133 grasps and reads the address where the image data is stored, and at the same time, the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data is set so that the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale are designated in the drawing list. The world conversion processing for converting the coordinates into the coordinate values of the world coordinate system is executed, and is set in the secured buffer area.

If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. Further, in the background setting process, the control ending process is executed to erase the background image data not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

In a succeeding step S2303, effect setting processing is executed. In the setting process for effect, the object data for displaying the effect image among the image data specified in the drawing list this time is grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If they are not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for effect, a control ending process is executed to delete the image data for effect which is not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

In a succeeding step S2304, a symbol setting process is executed. In the setting process for symbols, the object data for displaying symbols is grasped among the image data specified in the drawing list this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If they are not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the symbol setting process, a control ending process is executed to erase the image data for symbols not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

By executing the processes of steps S2302 to S2304, as shown in FIG. 45, the object is specified as an arrangement target by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angles, and scales that are also designated by the drawing list is completed.

Note that FIG. 45 simply shows a state in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged. Further, the image data PC1 for the backmost image does not need to have the coordinates in the Z-axis direction set to the back side with respect to all of the various object data PC2 to PC10. May be arranged in a bent state or an inclined state, so that the coordinates in the Z-axis direction are closer to the front side than some object data. However, in the area of the image data PC1 for the backmost image in which the coordinates in the X-axis direction and the coordinates in the Y-axis direction are the same as the partial object data, the coordinates in the Z-axis direction are on the far side from the object data. As a result, all the object data are not covered by the image data PC1 for the backmost image.

In the following step S2305, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and the direction of the viewpoint are determined based on the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set as the origin of the viewpoint based on the coordinates and the direction of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, the viewpoint PC11 shown by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. .. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 45 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

In a succeeding step S2306, conversion processing into the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion processing into the visual field coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems described above is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the visual field of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

In the following step S2307, clipping processing is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S2306 is grasped with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in this state, the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 45) corresponding to the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b (that is, the display surface P of the symbol display device 41) is used as a reference for extraction in step S2306. Clip each individual image created.

In a succeeding step S2308, a lighting process is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and the shadow, reflection, etc. of each object extracted by the clipping process are calculated based on the virtual light source. ..

In a succeeding step S2309, a color information setting process is executed. In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting the color information for each object extracted by the clipping process in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or vertex units. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process for pasting texture data corresponding to each object data extracted by the clipping process is executed. Also, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping and transparency mapping is executed.

Thereafter, in steps S2310 and S2311, each individual image extracted in step S2307 and further subjected to the lighting process and the color information setting process is projected onto the screen area PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). Or parallel projection) to create drawing data.

Specifically, first, in step S2310, background drawing data creation processing is executed. In the background drawing data creation process, the background data is drawn by performing projection on the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal on the image data and object data for the backmost image set as the background image. Create the data.

Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 41, and the background buffer in which the background drawing data is written in the screen buffer 144, and the drawing data and the design for the effect. The effect and the pattern buffer in which the drawing data for writing are collectively written are set. An area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 is set in the background buffer and the effect/symbol buffer. The background drawing data created in step S2310 is written in the background buffer. If the image data for the background is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the background is not created.

In a succeeding step S2311, drawing data creation processing for effects and symbols is executed. In the rendering data creation process for the effect and the pattern, the object data set as the effect image and the object data set as the pattern are projected on the screen area PC12 while the hidden surface is being erased, and thus the screen is displayed. Rendering data for effects and symbols is created in the buffer for effects and symbols in the buffer 144 for use. If image data for effects and symbols is not specified in the drawing list, drawing data for effects and symbols is not created.

After that, in step S2312, the drawing data combining process is executed, and then the present drawing process is ended. In the drawing data combination process of step S2312, the background drawing data and the drawing data for the effect and the pattern, which are individually created in the screen buffer 144 by the processes of step S2310 and step S2311, are combined, The composition result is written in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b as drawing data for one frame.

In this case, the writing order is defined such that the drawing data for the background→the drawing data for the effect and the pattern are arranged in this order from the back side to the front side. Therefore, the drawing data for the background is first written into the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, and then the drawing data for the effect and the design is written. At this time, when the α value of complete transparency is set for the pixel for which drawing is performed, the image on the back side is used as it is, and when the α value of semitransparent is set, the α value is The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the standard ratio, and when the α value for opacity is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. , Blending operations are executed.

By the way, each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, but a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion which is not projected in the drawing data for effect and design.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data, but since the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of the drawing data corresponding to the update timing that is one frame after the relevant frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit which alternately switches the frame regions 142a and 142b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame areas 142a and 142b, which are drawing targets, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

The above steps S2302 to S2307 are the processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and the above steps S2308 to S2312 are the processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Structure for performing loop production>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop effect will be described.

The loop effect is an effect in which a moving image in which the loop effect character performs a predetermined action is repeatedly displayed in a predetermined period including a plurality of image update timings. In the moving image for the loop effect, the image of the final frame and the image of the start frame are set to have continuity. Specifically, the image of the last frame and the image of the start frame are set to have continuity so that the player recognizes that the motions of the loop effect character are continuous motions. Accordingly, when the same loop effect moving image is displayed again after the loop effect moving image makes one round, the movement of the loop effect character can be made smooth.

The contents of the loop effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 46(a) and 46(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the moving image display in the loop effect.

As shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b), during the loop effect, a plurality of loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are simultaneously displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are displayed at the same time. 46(a) and 46(b), the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are shown in a simplified manner, but the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are the face, body, both hands, both feet. It is displayed so that the player recognizes that the person having "" is expressed. Further, the loop-producing A character CH8 and the loop-producing B character CH9 are different characters because at least one of the facial expression, the pattern including the pattern of clothes, the outer edge shape, and the size is different. It is displayed so that the player recognizes that there is. In the loop effect, a moving image is displayed so that the player recognizes that the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are performing different operations.

As the loop effect, the first loop effect mode shown in FIG. 46(a) and the second loop effect mode shown in FIG. 46(b) are set. In the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect mode, as shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the loop effect A character CH8 of the loop effect A character CH8 performed in one round of the corresponding loop effect moving image. The operation content is different and the operation content of the loop effect B character CH9 performed in one round of the corresponding loop effect moving image is also different. Then, when the loop effect is executed, after the first animation period in which the loop effect moving image in the first loop effect mode is repeated a plurality of times is performed, the loop effect moving image in the second loop effect mode is changed. The second animation period is repeated a plurality of times.

The loop effect is executed as an effect for game play, and occurs in the game time that results in a big hit. The first animation period occurs before a combination of symbols showing that it is a jackpot result is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, and the second animation period is a symbol showing that it is a jackpot result on the display surface P. Occurs after a combination of is displayed. Therefore, in the first animation period, a motion display that is expected to be a jackpot result is displayed in each of the loop-producing A character CH8 and the loop producing B character CH9, and in the second animation period, a jackpot result is displayed. A motion display to congratulate the change is displayed on each of the loop-producing A character CH8 and the loop-producing B character CH9.

When the loop effect is executed as described above, when the moving image for the loop effect is repeated in each of the first loop effect mode and the second effect mode, the loop effect is performed by the image of the final frame and the image of the start frame. The motion of the use A character CH8 has continuity, and the motion of the loop effect B character CH9 has continuity. On the other hand, between the image of the last frame in the moving image for loop effect in the first loop effect mode and the image of the start frame in the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode, the A character CH8 for loop effect is generated. The motion does not have continuity, and the motion of the loop effect B character CH9 does not have continuity.

Therefore, when the second animation period is performed after the first animation period, the data for displaying the image of the final frame in the loop effect moving image in the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect. The second animation period is started after the interpolation display period in which the interpolation display is performed using the data derived using the data for displaying the image of the start frame in the moving image for loop effect according to the aspect is executed. .. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for executing the loop effect will be described.

First, the data structure for executing the loop effect will be described. FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 133 for executing the loop effect. As shown in FIG. 47A, in the memory module 133, a first A character for causing the loop effect A character CH8 to perform a motion display corresponding to the moving image for the loop effect in the first loop effect mode. According to the animation data AD1, the second animation data AD2 for A character for causing the A character CH8 for loop effect to perform the operation display corresponding to the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode, and the first loop effect mode. A first animation data AD3 for the B character for causing the B character CH9 for loop effect to perform an operation display corresponding to the moving image for loop effect, and an operation display corresponding to the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode. The second animation data AD4 for the B character to be performed by the loop effect B character CH9 is stored in advance.

Each of the animation data AD1 to AD4 is data that determines the coordinates of each vertex in the object data for displaying the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Plural pieces of pointer information are set to the respective animation data AD1 to AD4 so as to be serial numbers, and the coordinate data of each vertex in the corresponding object data is set to each of the pointer information. The pointer information is updated when one frame progresses in the situation where the loop effect is being performed (every time when the image is updated), and the coordinate data to be referred to when the pointer information is updated is in the next order. It will be changed. In this case, the continuous coordinate data is set so as to perform the motion display corresponding to the moving image for the loop effect corresponding to the corresponding loop effect characters CH8 and CH9.

As described above, the first animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided to display the moving image for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode, and the second animation data AD2 for displaying the moving image for the loop effect according to the second loop effect mode. Animation data AD2 and AD4 are provided. As described above, since the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided in association with the moving image for loop effect according to each loop effect mode, it is possible to repeatedly display the moving image for loop effect in each period and at the same time. It is possible to suppress the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read. By suppressing the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 read at one time, it is possible to disperse the period required to read the animation data AD1 to AD4.

Even when the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are simultaneously displayed and the moving image for the loop effect is displayed in the same period, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B are displayed. Animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided corresponding to each of the characters CH9. This makes it possible to individually handle the animation data AD1 and AD3 for moving the loop effect A character CH8 and the animation data AD2 and AD4 for operating the loop effect B character CH9.

As shown in FIG. 47A, the memory module 133 is provided with a combination table CT as data for executing the loop effect, in addition to the animation data AD1 to AD4. The combination table CT is data that determines the combination ratio of the coordinate data of the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data of the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at each update timing of the interpolation display period.

The combination table CT will be described in detail with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the combination table CT, pointer information set in a one-to-one correspondence with all update timings included in the interpolation display period, and coordinate data of the first animation data AD1 and AD3 at update timings corresponding to each pointer information. And the data of the mixing ratio with the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2 and AD4 are set. Specifically, from the start timing to the end timing of the interpolation display period, the mixing ratio of the coordinate data of the first animation data AD1 and AD3 gradually decreases and the mixing ratio of the coordinate data of the second animation data AD2 and AD4. The combination table CT is set so that the value gradually increases. In this case, the combination of the coordinate table by the combination table CT is performed on the coordinate data of the final timing of the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data of the start timing of the second animation data AD2 and AD4. Therefore, during the interpolation display period, the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are displayed as moving images so that the display state at the final timing of the first animation period gradually changes to the display state at the start timing of the second animation period.

Next, how the loop effect is executed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 48(a) shows the first animation period, FIG. 48(b) shows the timing at which a moving image for loop effect is newly started in the first loop effect mode based on the first animation data AD1, AD3, and FIG. 48(c) shows an interpolation display period, FIG. 48(d) shows a second animation period, and FIG. 48(e) is a moving image for a loop effect in a second loop effect mode based on the second animation data AD2, AD4. Indicates the timing when is newly started.

The first animation period starts at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 48(a), and at the timing of t1, the timing of t2, and the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the first loop effect. The display circulation of the moving image for loop effect according to the mode is newly started. After that, at the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the display circulation of the moving image for the loop effect in the first loop rendering mode started at the timing of t3 ends, the first animation period ends as shown in FIG. 48(a). , The interpolation display period is started as shown in FIG. The interpolation display period continues until the timing of t5.

When the interpolation display period is ended at the timing of t5, the second animation period is started as shown in FIG. 48(d). Then, at each of the timing of t5, the timing of t6, and the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 48(e), the display circulation of the moving image for the loop effect in the second loop effect mode is newly started. Thereafter, at the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the display circulation of the moving image for the loop effect in the second loop effect mode started at the timing of t7 ends, the second animation period ends as shown in FIG. 48(d). R.

By the way, the duration T2 of the interpolation display period is the period T1 required for the moving image for the loop effect in the first loop effect mode to make one round in the first animation period and the loop effect in the second loop effect mode in the second animation period. It is set to be shorter than the period T3 required to complete one round of the moving picture.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the loop effect will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for loop effect executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the loop effect is executed by the effect calculation process of step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for the loop effect is activated when the information about the loop effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is the first animation period (step S2401: YES), it is determined in step S2402 whether it is the start timing of the first animation period. If it is the start timing of the first animation period (step S2402: YES), the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the first animation data AD3 for the B character are read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2403). In a succeeding step S2404, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying the A character for loop effect CH8 and the B character for loop effect CH9 is grasped. The image data includes the object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data. After that, in step S2405, the loop effect start designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the loop effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402 or when the processing of step S2405 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the update timing of this time is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2406). The image data includes the object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2407, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, since this time is the first animation period, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at the update timing of this time in the first animation data AD1 for the A character is read out, and In the first animation data AD3 for the B character, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at this update timing is read. Then, the read coordinate data is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 and the area secured in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. This updates the control information. As a result, it is possible to operate the loop effect A character CH8 according to the A character first animation data AD1, and to operate the loop effect B character CH9 according to the B character first animation data AD3. It will be possible.

In the following step S2408, the parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2406, and the derived parameter information is associated with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured in advance and the area secured in association with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2409, the loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

If it is the interpolation display period (step S2401: NO, step S2410: YES), the interpolation display period process is executed in step S2411. In the interpolation display period process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not it is the interpolation display start timing of the front side.

In the interpolation display period, as described above, the coordinate data of each vertex in the loop-producing A character CH8 is a mixture of the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the second animation data AD2 for the A character in a predetermined ratio. And the coordinate data of the vertices of the loop-producing B character CH9 is obtained by blending the first animation data AD3 for the B character and the second animation data AD4 for the B character in a predetermined ratio. Derived. In this case, the derivation of the coordinate data by the combination is not started simultaneously for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, but the derivation of the coordinate data by the combination for the loop effect A character CH8 is performed. Is started first, and at the next image update timing, the derivation of coordinate data based on the combination of the loop effect B character CH9 is started.

Such contents will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 51A shows the image update timing, FIG. 51B shows the first animation period of the looping A character CH8, and FIG. 51C shows the interpolation display period of the looping A character CH8. 51D shows the first animation period of the loop effect B character CH9, and FIG. 51E shows the interpolation display period of the loop effect B character CH9.

At each of the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t4, the image update timing is set as shown in FIG. In this case, for the loop-effect A character CH8, at the timing of t2, the first animation period ends as shown in FIG. 51(b) and the interpolation display period starts as shown in FIG. 51(c). It However, at the timing of t2, the first animation period is continued for the loop effect B character CH9. After that, at the timing of t3 which is the update timing after one frame, for the loop effect B character CH9, the first animation period ends as shown in FIG. 51(d) and as shown in FIG. 51(e). Then, the interpolation display period is started.

Returning to the description of the interpolation display period process (FIG. 50), the start timing of the interpolation display period is the start timing of deriving the coordinate data by the blending for the loop effect A character CH8. In this case, an affirmative decision is made in step S2501 and the operation proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, the second animation data AD2 for the A character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. Further, in step S2503, the combination table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132.

In the following step S2504, the type of image data corresponding to the update timing of this time is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The image data includes the object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2505, the coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect A character CH8 is updated. In the updating process, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for the A character are stored in the combination table CT. Mix in a ratio corresponding to the first pointer information. Specifically, the coordinate data of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 and the coordinate data of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 are mixed at a ratio of 95:5 between the corresponding vertices. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop-producing A character CH8.

Then, in step S2506, the coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect B character CH9 is updated. Specifically, in the first animation data AD3 for the B character, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing is read. Then, the read coordinate data is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9, thereby updating the control information. Here, even at the immediately preceding update timing, that is, at the final timing of the first animation period, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for the B character is used as the coordinate data of each vertex of the loop-producing B character CH9. Is used. Therefore, at the start timing of the interpolation display period, the coordinate data of each vertex in the loop effect B character CH9 is not changed from the immediately preceding update timing.

In the following step S2507, the parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2504, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured in advance and the area secured in association with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2508, the loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When it is the next image update timing with respect to the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2501: NO, step S2509: YES), the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2501). S2510). Further, in step S2511, the combination table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. Here, at the start timing of the interpolation display period, as already described, the combination table CT to be applied to the animation data AD1 and AD2 for the A character has already been read into the work RAM 132 in step S2503. On the other hand, in order to apply to the combination table CT for applying to the animation data AD1 and AD2 for the A character and the animation data AD3 and AD4 for the B character by newly reading the combination table CT in step S2511. The combination table CT of No. will be individually read into the work RAM 132. As a result, even if the composition of the coordinate data using the combination table CT is started with a delay of one update timing between the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the combination table is started. It becomes possible to start blending the coordinate data from the ratio corresponding to the first pointer information by CT.

In the following step S2512, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. The image data includes the object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2513, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In the update process, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for the A character are used for the loop rendering A. In the combination table CT corresponding to the character CH8, the combination is performed at a ratio corresponding to the pointer information of this time. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop-producing A character CH8. Further, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for the B character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD4 for the B character are set in the loop-producing B character CH9. Compounding is performed in a ratio corresponding to the pointer information of this time in the corresponding compounding table CT. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop-producing B character CH9.

In the following step S2507, the parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2512, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured in advance and the area secured in association with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2508, the loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When it is the interpolation display period and the update timing after the interpolation display start timing on the rear side (step S2501: NO, step S2509: NO), the process proceeds to step S2512 without executing the processes of step S2510 and step S2511. .. In step S2512, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The image data includes the object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2513, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In the update process, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for the A character are used for the loop rendering A. In the combination table CT corresponding to the character CH8, the combination is performed at a ratio corresponding to the pointer information of this time. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop-producing A character CH8. Further, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for the B character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD4 for the B character are set in the loop-producing B character CH9. Compounding is performed in a ratio corresponding to the pointer information of this time in the corresponding compounding table CT. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop-producing B character CH9.

In the following step S2507, the parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2512, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured in advance and the area secured in association with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2508, the loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

Returning to the description of the calculation process for loop effect (FIG. 49 ), in the case of the second animation period (step S2401 and step S2410: NO), the current update timing is dealt with based on the currently set execution target table. The type of image data is grasped (step S2406). The image data includes the object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2407, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, since this time is the second animation period, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at this update timing in the second animation data AD2 for the A character are read out, and In the second animation data AD4 for the B character, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at this update timing is read. Then, the read coordinate data is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 and the area secured in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. This updates the control information. As a result, it becomes possible to operate the loop effect A character CH8 according to the second animation data AD2 for the A character, and it is possible to operate the loop effect B character CH9 according to the second animation data AD4 for the B character. It will be possible.

In the following step S2408, the parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2406, and the derived parameter information is associated with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured in advance and the area secured in association with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2409, the loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When the calculation process for the loop effect is executed as described above, the object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop are included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609). The use instruction information of the texture data corresponding to the effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the texture data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9 is set. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the image data including the coordinate data of each vertex is set. Further, the loop effect designation information is set in the drawing list, and further, the loop effect start designation information is set at the start timing of the loop effect.

Next, the loop effect setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for loop effect is executed as a part of the setting process for effect executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the loop effect specifying information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for loop effect is executed.

When the loop effect start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2601: YES), the object corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8 in the memory module 133 is calculated from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The data, the texture data corresponding to the looping A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the looping B character CH9, and the address where the texture data corresponding to the looping B character CH9 are stored are grasped and grasped. Based on the result, these image data are read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S2602).

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or if the process of step S2602 is executed, in step S2603, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. Further, in step S2604, the coordinate data of each vertex in the world coordinate system of the object data for displaying the loop-producing A character CH8 and the object data for displaying the loop-producing B character CH9 are respectively set to the current coordinate data. It is grasped from the drawing list, and in step S2605, other parameter information of these object data and the corresponding texture data is grasped. Then, in step S2606, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasping result of step S2603 to step S2605.

By executing the setting process for loop effect as described above, the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 and the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 are arranged in the world coordinate system, and The coordinate data derived from each of the animation data AD1 to AD4 is applied as the coordinate data of each vertex. Thereby, on the display surface P, a moving image is displayed so that the loop-effect A character CH8 and the loop-effect B character CH9 operate in a manner corresponding to each of the first animation period, the interpolation display period, and the second animation period. Be seen.

First animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided to display the moving image for the loop effect in the first loop effect mode, and second animation data AD2 to display the moving image for the loop effect in the second loop effect mode. , AD4 are provided. As described above, since the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided in association with the moving image for loop effect according to each loop effect mode, it is possible to repeatedly display the moving image for loop effect in each period and at the same time. It is possible to suppress the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read. By suppressing the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 read at one time, it is possible to disperse the period required to read the animation data AD1 to AD4.

Even when the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are simultaneously displayed and the moving image for the loop effect is displayed in the same period, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B are displayed. Animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided corresponding to each of the characters CH9. This makes it possible to individually handle the animation data AD1 and AD3 for moving the loop effect A character CH8 and the animation data AD2 and AD4 for operating the loop effect B character CH9.

Between the first animation period in which the moving image for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode is displayed and the second animation period in which the moving image for the loop effect according to the second loop effect mode is displayed, the first animation data is generated. An interpolation display period for displaying a moving image is set using the coordinate data derived by mixing the coordinate data of AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data of the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at a predetermined ratio. Accordingly, even if the continuity of the motion display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 is not guaranteed between the first animation data AD1 and AD2 and the second animation data AD2 and AD4, the second animation from the first animation period It is possible to ensure the continuity of the motion display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 when shifting to the period.

The timing when the first animation period ends for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period starts and the timing when the first animation period ends for the loop effect B character CH9 and the interpolation display period starts. It is set so that the update timing is different. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period from becoming extremely large.

With respect to the timing when the first animation period ends for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period starts, the first animation period ends for the loop effect B character CH9 at the next image update timing and interpolation is performed. The display period starts. As a result, even when the start timing of the interpolation display period is different between the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, when the second animation period is started in the loop effect A character CH8. Makes it possible to start the second animation period in the loop effect B character CH9 early.

The same combination table CT is used during both the interpolation display period for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period for the loop effect B character CH9. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to execute the interpolation display period.

<Another form of configuration related to loop production>
When the loop effect is executed, both the first animation period and the second animation period are not limited to the configuration that always occurs. For example, in the game times that result in a deviation, the reach display in the effect for game times is displayed. The first animation period is generated as the effect of, but the second animation period is not generated, and the second animation period is the second animation period after the first animation period as the reach display effect in the game time effect in the game time that is the jackpot result. May occur. In this case, there may be a case where only the first animation period occurs as the loop effect and a case where the second animation period occurs after the first animation period. Therefore, the animation data is changed to the first animation data AD1 and AD3. It is preferable to distinguish between the second animation data AD2 and AD4. Then, in the configuration in which the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided for the first animation period and the second animation period, the motions of the loop effect characters CH8, CH9 are made smooth as in the above embodiment. Therefore, it is preferable to set the interpolation display period.

The first animation period ends for the loop effect B character CH9 at the next image update timing with respect to the timing when the first animation period ends for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period starts. The interpolation display period is not limited to being started, and the first animation period of the loop effect B character CH9 ends and the interpolation display period starts after a plurality of update timings with respect to the former timing. It may be configured to be.

The start timing of the process of deriving the coordinate data by blending the coordinate data of the first animation data AD1, AD3 and the coordinate data of the second animation data AD2, AD4 at a predetermined ratio is the loop production A character CH8 and the loop. In the configuration different from that for the production B character CH9, the interpolation display period in which the coordinate data derived by blending is used is started simultaneously for the loop production A character CH8 and the loop production B character CH9. It may be configured. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously start the operation of the interpolation display period in appearance of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect character CH9 while distributing the processing load.

<Another form of processing for interpolation display period>
In the above-described embodiment, the timing for ending the first animation period is predetermined, and the coordinate data of the vertices of the loop effect characters CH8, CH9 at the ending timing of the first animation period is used for the loop effect. However, instead of this, the timing at which the first animation period ends may change, so that the apex of each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period may change. The coordinate data may change every time the loop effect is executed. A specific configuration in which the coordinate data of each vertex can change in this way will be described in detail below.

In the present embodiment, the effect operation device operated by the player is electrically connected to the sound emission control device 60, and the effect operation device is operated during the execution of the first animation period. When it is specified by the side MPU 62, a command corresponding to the command is transmitted to the display CPU 131, and when the command is received, the display CPU 131 ends the first animation period and executes the interpolation display period and then the second animation period. To start. In the configuration, for example, in the game times that result in a deviation, the first animation period occurs as the production of the reach display in the production for the game times, but the second animation period does not occur. When applied to the configuration in which the second animation period occurs after the first animation period as the reach display effect in the diversion effect, the timing at which the effect operation device is operated in the first animation period in the game time that results in a jackpot. Accordingly, it is possible to change the start timing of the second animation period, which is a final notification that the jackpot result will be obtained. In this case, while using the loop effect, it is possible to perform the confirmation notification at a timing corresponding to the operation timing of the effect operation device.

In the configuration in which the timing of ending the first animation period may change as described above, the operation mode of the loop-producing A character CH8 and the operation mode of the loop effect B-character CH9 also change at the ending timing of the first animation period. obtain. Then, when the start timing of the interpolation display period is set to different update timings for the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the operation modes of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. It is preferable to change the target of which the interpolation display period is started first according to the above.

Specifically, of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the changing motion of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 between the end timing of the first animation period and the start timing of the second animation period. The side with a larger amount has a larger amount of movement at one update timing in the interpolation display period than the side with a smaller amount of change movement. Then, it is preferable that the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side with the larger amount of change motion have more image update timing during the interpolation display period. On the other hand, even if the start timing of the interpolation display period is different for each loop effect character CH8, CH9, the end timing of the interpolation display period is the same for each loop effect character CH8, CH9. Therefore, the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side where the end timing of the interpolation display period is late have a smaller number of image update timings generated during the interpolation display period than on the earlier side. In view of this, in the present alternative mode, the interpolation display period is started first from the side with the largest amount of change motion in relation to the end timing of the first animation period in each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9. ..

As data for determining the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are targets for starting the interpolation display period first in relation to the end timing of the first animation period, in the present alternative embodiment, the memory module 133 is used for determining the start target first. The table PDT is stored in advance. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first start target determination table PDT.

In the first start target determination table PDT, the range of the number of frames (the number of image update timings) that can occur as the first animation period and the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are the targets for starting the interpolation display period first. The correspondence relationship with is predetermined. The correspondence relationship is the operation mode of each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at each update timing of the first animation period at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 and each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at the start timing of the second animation period. It is decided by comparing with the operation mode of. Specifically, when the number of frames in the first animation period is 0th frame (frame at start timing) to 49th frame, 100th frame to 149th frame, and 200th frame to 249th frame, the number of frames on the previous start side is higher. A loop effect B character CH9 is set as a character. On the other hand, when the number of frames in the first animation period is the 50th frame to the 99th frame, the 150th frame to the 199th frame, and the 250th frame to the 299th frame (the frame at the final timing), it is looped as the character on the first start side. The effect A character CH8 is set.

A processing configuration for determining the target loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolation display period is first started by using the first start target determination table PDT will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart for explaining another form of the interpolation display period process executed by the display CPU 72. The interpolation display period processing is performed after the performance operation device is operated in the middle of the first animation period or after the final timing of the first animation period and until the end timing of the interpolation display period. The calculation process for loop effect (FIG. 49) is executed every time it is activated.

When it is the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2701: YES), the table for PDT for determining the start destination is read from the memory module 133, and the character whose current frame number in the first animation period is the start side is used for the loop rendering A. It is determined whether or not the frame number corresponds to the character CH8 (step S2702). When the number corresponds to the number of frames in which the character on the starting side is the loop effect A character CH8 (step S2702: YES), the second animation data AD2 for the A character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2703). ). On the other hand, when it corresponds to the number of frames in which the character on the previous start side is the B character for loop effect CH9 (step S2702: NO), the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 ( Step S2704). When the process of step S2703 is executed or the process of step S2704 is executed, the combination table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 in step S2705.

In subsequent step S2706, the type of image data corresponding to the update timing of this time is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. After that, in step S2707, the coordinate data update processing according to the combination table CT is executed for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that have started the interpolation display period first. Further, in step S2708, the same coordinate data as the coordinate data at the immediately preceding update timing is grasped for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that did not start the interpolation display period first. After that, in step S2709, update processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S2710, loop effect designation information is stored. The processing contents of these steps S2706 to S2710 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2504 to S2508 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

When it is the next image update timing with respect to the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2701: NO, step S2711: YES), the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that did not become the side that first starts the interpolation display period. The second animation data AD2, AD4 corresponding to is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2712). Specifically, when the processing of step S2703 is executed in the processing time of the immediately preceding interpolation display period processing, the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read out, and the immediately preceding interpolation display period processing processing is performed. When the process of step S2704 is executed for the first time, the second animation data AD2 for the A character is read. Then, in step S2713, the combination table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132.

In the following step S2714, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. After that, in step S2715, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2709, update processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S2710, loop effect designation information is stored. The processing contents of these steps S2709 to S2710 and steps S2714 to S2715 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2507 to S2508 and steps S2512 to S2513 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment. .. Further, the processing content when the negative determination is made in step S2711 is the same as the processing content when the negative determination is made in step S2509 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

According to this another mode, the types of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are the targets for starting the interpolation display period first depend on the operation mode of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. Since it is changed, not only the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period can be reduced, but also the interpolation display can be performed in a mode according to the end timing of the first animation period. Therefore, even if the end timing of the first animation period is variable, the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period is reduced while smoothly performing the interpolation display of the respective loop effect characters CH8 and CH9. It becomes possible.

Further, since the type corresponding to the end timing of the first animation period of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are the targets for starting the interpolation display period first is set in advance as the start target determination table PDT, the interpolation display is performed. It is possible to reduce the processing load when determining the types of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are targets for starting the period first.

<Still another form of processing for interpolation display period>
The type of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are the targets for starting the interpolation display period first is not limited to the configuration set in advance as the first start target determination table PDT. For example, in the first animation period. From the coordinate data of the vertices of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing and the coordinate data of the vertices of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the start timing of the second animation period, the end of the first animation period is completed. The amount of movement of each loop effect character CH8, CH9 from the timing to the start timing of the second animation period is derived by calculation, and the interpolated display period is preceded by the derived loop effect character CH8, CH9 on the side with the larger amount of action. May be configured to start.

The amount of movement is small, instead of the configuration in which the interpolating display period is started first from the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side with a large amount of movement from the end timing of the first animation period to the start timing of the second animation period. The loop display characters CH8 and CH9 on the side may be configured to start the interpolation display period first.

<Structure for performing bone model display production>
Next, a configuration for performing a bone model display effect will be described. 55(a) and 55(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the bone model display.

Bone model display means, when the bone display character CH10 representing a person or the like is displayed in 3D as shown in FIG. 55(a), a plurality of bones are displayed as object data as shown in FIG. 55(b). The display content uses the skeleton data FRD1 including the data BOD and the plurality of joint data JOD, and the skin data SKD1 that is set in association with the skeleton data FRD1 and represents the skin portion. The bone data BOD corresponds to the bone portion of the bone display character CH10, and the joint data JOD corresponds to the joint portion connecting a plurality of bone data BODs. Therefore, by changing the coordinate data and the orientation data of the bone data BOD with reference to the joint data JOD, the coordinate data of each vertex data TD in the skin data SKD1 set in association with the skeleton data FRD1 is changed, and The form of the bone display character CH10 is accordingly changed. Note that part of the skin data is omitted in FIG. 55(b).

A relationship between a parent and a child is set in a plurality of bone data BODs, and when the parent-targeted bone data BOD moves, the parent-targeted bone data BOD is followed and the parent-targeted bone data BOD becomes a child-targeted relationship. A certain bone data BOD will move. In the bone display character CH10, the bone data corresponding to the spine part is set as the highest parent target bone data BOD of the main parent target, and the bone data BOD of the main parent target is passed through the joint data JOD. The connected bone data BODs all correspond to child target bone data BODs. Also in the child-targeted bone data BOD, between the main parent-targeted bone data BOD and the bone data BODs arranged in a line, the bone data BOD on the side closer to the main parent-targeted bone data BOD is on the far side. The parent data has a relationship with the bone data BOD. Therefore, when the main parent target bone data BOD moves, the other bone data BOD also moves according to the predetermined bone weighting data BWD1. Even when the main parent target bone data BOD does not move, the bone data BOD that is in the parent target relationship among the plurality of bone data BODs arranged in a line from the main parent target bone data BOD moves In addition, the bone data BOD having a child target relationship with that also moves according to the predetermined bone weighting data BWD1.

The skin data SKD1 has many vertex data TD, one polygon is defined by three or four vertex data TD, and the skin data SKD1 is expressed by many polygons. Each vertex data TD is associated with one or a plurality of bone data BOD according to the skin weighting data SWD1. As a result, when the bone data BOD moves, the coordinate data of each vertex data TD is changed according to the skin weighting data SWD1, the skin data SKD1 is deformed accordingly, and finally a mode according to the operation of the bone data BOD. The bone display character CH10 operates and the skin portion of the bone display character CH10 is deformed.

In the bone model display effect, a plurality of bone display characters including the bone display character CH10 are displayed. A data structure for executing the bone model display effect will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data structure for displaying a bone model.

As shown in FIG. 56, the memory module 133 has a plurality of bone display characters including the skeleton data FRD1 of the bone display character CH10 as an area for storing image data for displaying a bone model. The skeleton data storage area 161 in which the skeleton data corresponding to is stored, and the skin data storage in which the skin data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters including the skin data SKD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance An area 162 and a texture data storage area 163 in which texture data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters including the texture data BTD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance are provided. The skeleton data and the skin data are as described above. The texture data BTD1 is data that determines the color information of the bone display character CH10, and the color information is defined in relation to the vertex data of the skin data SKD1. Therefore, by applying the skin data SKD1 to the skeleton data FRD1 and then applying the texture data BTD1, the bone display character CH10 can be displayed. These skeleton data FRD1, skin data SKD1 and texture data BTD1 are used by the VDP 135.

In the memory module 133, control data other than image data is stored in advance as data for displaying a bone model. As an area for storing the control data, the bone weighting data storage area 164 in which the bone weighting data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone displaying characters including the bone weighting data BWD1 of the bone displaying character CH10 is stored in advance is stored. And a skin weighting data storage area 165 in which skin weighting data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone displaying characters including the skin weighting data SWD1 of the bone displaying character CH10 is stored in advance, and a bone animation of the bone displaying character CH10. A bone animation data storage area 166 in which bone animation data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the data BAD1 is stored in advance is provided.

The bone weighting data BWD1 defines a relationship between a parent target and a child target in a plurality of bone data BOD included in the skeleton data FRD1 and also sets a movement amount when the parent target bone data BOD moves to the child target bone data BOD. The ratio of the case of reflection is determined. The skin weighting data SWD1 defines a correspondence relationship between the bone data BOD and each vertex data of the skin data SKD1 and a ratio when the movement amount when the bone data BOD moves is reflected on each vertex data.

The bone animation data BAD1 is data that determines the coordinates of the bone data BOD at each update timing in order to cause the bone display character CH10 to perform a predetermined motion over a plurality of update timings. A plurality of pointer information is set in the bone animation data BAD1 so as to be serial numbers, and each of the pointer information has the current data from the previous coordinate data for each of the bone data BOD to be moved and set. Difference data is set. In this case, the bone data BOD for which the difference data is to be set has the difference data set only for a part of the bone data BOD necessary for determining the rough movement of the bone display character CH10, and the remaining bone data BOD is set. For the bone data BOD, coordinate data is determined according to the bone weighting data BWD1. Further, even if the bone data BOD for which the differential data is set has a child target relationship with other bone data BOD, not only the differential data determined by the bone animation data BAD1 The coordinate data is determined according to the coordinate data of the parent target bone data BOD and the bone weighting data BWD1.

Here, when displaying each bone display character CH10, the coordinate data of each bone data BOD of the corresponding skeleton data FRD1 is determined by calculation. A plurality of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 are set in the skeleton data FRD1 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Specifically, 50 pieces of bone data of 1st to 50th bone data BOD1 to BOD50 are set. Each of the bone display characters CH10 displayed in the bone model display effect has a plurality of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 within a maximum of 50. As an area for calculating the coordinate data of each of the bone data BOD1 to BOD50, the work RAM 132 is provided with a coordinate calculation area 169 as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 57(b). The coordinate calculation area 169 is provided with 50 unit calculation areas corresponding to the maximum number of the bone data BOD1 to BOD50 of the bone display character CH10. Addresses (first to fiftieth addresses) are set.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the bone model display effect will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for bone model display effect executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the bone model display effect is executed in the effect calculation process of step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for the bone model display effect is started when the information about the bone model display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is the start timing of the bone model display effect (step S2801: YES), the control data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters to be displayed in the current bone model display effect is loaded from the memory module 133. Read to RAM132. Specifically, the bone weighting data, the skin weighting data, and the bone animation data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters to be displayed are read (step S2802). In a succeeding step S2803, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying each of the plurality of bone displaying characters is grasped. The image data includes skeleton data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters. Then, in step S2804, the start designation information of the bone model display effect for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the bone model display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S2801 or the process of step S2804 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the update timing of this time is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2805). The image data includes skeleton data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters.

After that, in step S2806, a value corresponding to the number of bone display characters that are currently displayed is set in the bone model number counter provided in the work RAM 132. In a succeeding step S2807, a setting process to the unit bone number counter provided in the work RAM 132 is executed. In the setting process to the unit bone number counter, the number of bone data included in the skeleton data of the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter is set to the unit bone number counter.

Then, in step S2808, each unit calculation area included in the coordinate calculation area 169 of the work RAM 132 is cleared to "0". In the following step S2809, the coordinate data set at the previous update timing of each bone data in the bone display character which is the current coordinate calculation target is read from the area secured corresponding to the bone display character. , Are set in the corresponding unit calculation areas of the coordinate calculation area 169.

Then, in step S2810, coordinate calculation processing is executed. The coordinate calculation process is executed for all the bone data corresponding to the bone display character that is the target of the coordinate calculation this time, but the execution order is first for the main parent target bone data, and then for the parent data. Bone data having a high priority as a target is sequentially processed. As a result, the coordinate data of the main parent target bone data is calculated first, and then the coordinate data is calculated in order from the parent target bone data closer to the main parent target bone data, and finally the end child target. The coordinate data of the bone data of is calculated.

The coordinate calculation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When the bone data corresponding to the current value of the unit bone number counter is not the main parent target bone data (step S2901: NO), in step S2902, the bone data having the parent target relationship with the current bone data is acquired. About the coordinate data newly calculated for this update timing and the coordinate data set at the previous update timing (that is, written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the current calculation target bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169). The difference data between the current calculation target bone and the calculated difference data and the bone weighting data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. Difference data of coordinate data to be applied to the data is calculated. Then, the difference data is coordinate data at the previous update timing in the current calculation target bone data (that is, the coordinate data written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the current calculation target bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169). ) To calculate new coordinate data. The calculated coordinate data is written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the current calculation target bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2901 or if the processing of step S2902 is executed, then in step S2903, the current calculation is performed on the bone animation data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. It is determined whether difference data is set for the target bone data. When the difference data is set (step S2903: YES), the difference data set in the bone animation data is set to a unit corresponding to the current calculation target bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169 in step S2904. It is applied to the coordinate data written in the calculation area, and the applied coordinate data is written in the unit calculation area.

Returning to the description of the calculation processing for bone model display effect (FIG. 58 ), after executing the coordinate calculation processing in step S2810, the value of the unit bone number counter of the work RAM 132 is decremented by 1 in step S2811. When the value of the unit bone number counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S2812: NO), coordinate calculation processing (step S2810) is executed for the bone data corresponding to the current value of the unit bone number counter.

When the value of the unit bone number counter is "0" (step S2812: YES), it means that the coordinate calculation processing of all the bone data has been completed for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. To do. In this case, the coordinate data update process is executed in step S2813. In the coordinate data update processing, the coordinate data corresponding to the update timing of this time written in the unit operation area of the coordinate operation area 169 is caused to correspond to the bone display character that is the operation target of this time in the work RAM 132. Write in the secured area.

In subsequent step S2814, a coordinate calculation process of skin data is executed. In the coordinate calculation process of the skin data, referring to the skin weighting data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter, the coordinate data of each bone data of the bone display character is made to correspond to each other. The coordinate data of each vertex data of the skin data is calculated. Then, the coordinate data is written in the area reserved in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the bone display character that is the current calculation target.

In a succeeding step S2815, with respect to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter, parameter information other than the coordinate data of the bone data and the coordinate data of the skin data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is In the work RAM 132, the data is written in an area secured in correspondence with the bone display character that is the current calculation target.

Thereafter, in step S2816, the value of the bone model number counter of the work RAM 132 is decremented by 1. When the value of the bone model number counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S2817: NO), the processes of steps S2807 to S2816 are executed for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. .. When the value of the bone model number counter is "0" (step S2817: YES), the specification information of the bone model display effect for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the bone model display effect in step S2818. It is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When the calculation processing for the bone model display effect is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609), a plurality of bone display characters to be displayed are displayed. Information on instructions for using the corresponding skeleton data, skin data, and texture data is set. In addition, parameter information to be applied to each image data is set in the drawing list, including coordinate data of bone data in each bone display character and coordinate data of each vertex data of skin data. Further, the designation information of the bone model display effect is set in the drawing list, and further, the start designation information of the bone model display effect is set at the start timing of the bone model display effect.

Next, the setting process for the bone model display effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bone model display effect setting process is executed as a part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the designation information of the bone model display effect is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the bone model display effect is executed.

When the start designation information of the bone model display effect is set in the drawing list this time (step S3001: YES), the memory module 133 becomes the display target of this time from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The addresses of the areas in which the skeleton data, the skin data and the texture data corresponding to the plurality of bone display characters are stored are grasped, and based on the grasped results, these image data are stored in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. It is read (step S3002).

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or if the process of step S3002 is executed, in step S3003, the type of image data corresponding to the update timing of this time is grasped. In step S3004, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each bone data corresponding to each bone display character to be displayed is grasped from the drawing list this time, and in step S3005, The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the vertex data of the skin data corresponding to each of the bone display characters is grasped from the drawing list this time, and further, in step S3006, each bone display target is displayed. Other parameter information about the character for use is grasped from the drawing list this time. Then, in step S3007, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasping result of steps S3003 to S3006.

By executing the setting process for the bone model display effect as described above, the skeleton data and the skin data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters that are the present display targets are arranged in the world coordinate system. In addition, coordinate data derived by using bone weighting data, skin weighting data, and bone animation data is applied as coordinate data of each bone data and skin data. As a result, a moving image is displayed on the display surface P so that the plurality of bone display characters move.

<Explanation of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5>
Here, a collective character group CHG is set as one type of bone display character. 61(a) and 61(b) are explanatory views for explaining the group character group CHG.

As shown in FIG. 61A, the collective character group CHG is composed of a plurality (specifically, five) of collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. As shown in FIG. 61(b), each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 has a set skeleton data FRD2 having a plurality of bone data ABD and a plurality of joint data AJD, a set skin data SKD2, and a set. It is displayed using the texture data BTD2. By performing the calculation process for bone model display effect (FIG. 58) and the setting process for bone model display effect (FIG. 60) which have already been described for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, predetermined coordinate data is set. The set skin data SKD2 is applied to the set skeleton data FRD2, and the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are displayed in 3D in the world coordinate system as shown in FIG. 61(b). By performing drawing while applying the texture data for collection BTD2 thereto, the image of each collection unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed on the display surface P as shown in FIG. 61(a). The respective data FRD2, SKD2, BTD2 are stored in advance in the memory module 133 as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), each of the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed in such a manner that the player recognizes that the characters have the same shape, pattern and size. These group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 perform a specific motion around the bone display character CH10, for example, when the bone display character CH10 is displayed on the display surface P so as to perform a predetermined motion. It is displayed on the display surface P. In this case, the bone display character CH10 displays an action display indicating the profit expectation level such as a jackpot result, whereas the action display indicating the profit expectation level is performed in the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. I don't know. Then, when the bone model display effect is executed, the player pays attention to the bone display character CH10. Under such circumstances, the bone display character CH10 requires a fine movement, while the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 do not require a fine movement. Therefore, the number of bone data ABD of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is set to be smaller than the number of bone data BOD of the bone display character CH10, and it is necessary to display each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. A device for reducing the amount of data and a device for reducing the processing load for displaying each group unit character CHG1 to CHG5 are provided.

Hereinafter, the data structure for displaying each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 will be described in detail. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the skeleton data FRD2 of each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. FIGS. 63(a) to 63(c) show the bone display character CH10 and the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. It is explanatory drawing for comparing each data amount.

As shown in FIG. 62, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the number of bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2, and the number of bone data ABD21 to ABD30 of the third set unit character CHG3. The number, the number of bone data ABD31 to ABD40 of the fourth set unit character CHG4, and the number of bone data ABD41 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit character CHG5 are all 10, and all set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is 50. The bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are set by being aggregated into one set skeleton data FRD2.

The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is the same as the total number of bone data BOD of the bone display character CH10. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63(a-1) and FIG. 63(a-2), only one character, the bone display character CH10, is displayed by the skeleton data FRD1 and the first to fifth by the skeleton data for aggregation FRD2. Although it is possible to display 5 characters of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the skeleton data FRD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10 and the set skeleton data for displaying each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. The data amount is the same as or substantially the same as that of FRD2. In this case, the data capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the same number of bone data as the bone display character CH10 is set in association with each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Further, the skeleton data FRD1 and FRD2 are accompanied by the header data referred to by the VDP 135, but the skeleton data is not individually set for each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, but one set skeleton. By consolidating as data FRD2, it is possible to reduce such accompanying data.

The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is 50, and these bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are collectively set in one set skeleton data FRD2, so that the bone display effect is produced. 58 (FIG. 58), the coordinate data of each of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are collectively calculated in the same manner as the bone data of one bone display character.

Specifically, in the calculation process for bone display effect (FIG. 58), the coordinate data of each bone data is derived for calculation as already described, but this calculation includes the skeleton data. The bone data is collectively read and processed collectively (steps S2808 to S2813). Then, in this calculation processing, the coordinate calculation area 169 provided in the work RAM 132 is used. However, in the coordinate calculation area 169, a unit capable of storing the data for calculating the coordinate data of each bone data. The number of calculation areas is 50. On the other hand, the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are set by being aggregated into one set skeleton data FRD2 as described above, and the total number of the bone data ABD1 to ADB50 is the coordinates. It is less than or equal to the total number of unit calculation areas in the calculation area 169. Therefore, when calculating the coordinate data of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, it is possible to read the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 at once and execute the calculation processing. Therefore, the data is individually read out for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and after the calculation of the bone data coordinate data for one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is completed, the next set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is set. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the coordinate data of the bone data is calculated.

In the configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set of skeleton data FRD2, a character having a different relationship between the parent object and the child object of each bone data ABD1 to ABD50 Is set between. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is the same, and as shown in FIG. 61(b), each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. The skeletons of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 have the same shape and the same size because the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 in FIG. In this case, each bone data ABD1 to ABD50 included in the same group G1 to G10 in FIG. 62 corresponds to a skeleton portion at the same position in each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. For example, the first bone data ABD1, the eleventh bone data ABD11, the twenty-first bone data ABD21, the thirty-first bone data ABD31, and the forty-first bone data ABD41 included in the first group G1 are respectively associated with corresponding set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. It corresponds to the skeleton of the head, and the 10th bone data ABD10, the 20th bone data ABD20, the 30th bone data ABD30, the 40th bone data ABD40, and the 50th bone data ABD50 included in the 10th group G10 respectively correspond. The set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 correspond to the skeleton of the right foot.

In each of the groups G1 to G10, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are set in a parent object relationship with the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. There is. For example, in the first group G1, the first bone data ABD1 of the first set unit character CHG1 is the 11th bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, and the 31st bone data ABD31 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. And the 41st bone data ABD 41 are set to have a parent-object relationship.

On the other hand, with respect to other than that, the relationship between the parent object and the child object in any of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the same set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 and in the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of different set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Is not set. For example, the relationship between the parent target and the child target is not set among the first to tenth bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1. Further, for example, between the 11th bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, the 31st bone data ABD31, and the 41st bone data ABD41 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 in the first group G1 Has not been established.

In the configuration in which the relationship between the parent target and the child target is set as described above, the set bone weighting data BWD2 (see FIG. 56) stored in the memory module 133 is the bone data ABD1 of the first set unit character CHG1. When the difference data of the coordinate data is applied to any of the ABD10 to ABD10, the other set unit characters CHG2 included in the same group G1 to G10 as the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 to which the difference data is applied are applied. It is set to be directly applied to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of CHG5. Therefore, the second to fifth group unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 follow the first group unit character CHG1 when it moves.

On the other hand, since the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set between the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, one bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 has moved. However, the other bone data ABD1 to ABD10 do not move following it. The same applies to the second to fifth group unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. Further, since the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set between the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth group unit characters CHG2 to CHG5, for example, the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second group unit character CHG2. , The bone data ABD31 to ABD50 of the third to fifth group unit characters CHG3 to CHG5 will not move following it. As a matter of course, since the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 have a parent object relationship with the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2, the bone data ABD1 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2 is Even if the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 move, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 does not follow and move.

Refer to FIGS. 64 and 65 for the bone animation data for aggregation BAD2 for operating the aggregate unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 and the operation contents of the aggregate unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 when the aggregate bone animation data BAD2 is used. While explaining. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the set bone animation data BAD2, and FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation content of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5.

As shown in FIG. 64, pointer information corresponding to one update timing of the image is set in the aggregate bone animation data BAD2, and difference data is set corresponding to each pointer information. For the pointer information “0” to “m”, difference data is set only for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1. The difference data corresponds to data that is moved in one direction while maintaining the shape of the first set unit character CHG1.

During the period in which such difference data is set, each group unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 65(a). Specifically, at the initial display positions of the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, as shown in FIG. 65(a-1), the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 have the same shape as each other. Are lined up at equal intervals in the direction. In this case, when the difference data set in the pointer information of “0” to “m” is applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the difference data is directly changed to the second to second data. Since it is applied to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5, as shown in FIG. 65(a-2), the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are unidirectional while maintaining their shapes and intervals. Moving.

Returning to the description of the set bone animation data BAD2 shown in FIG. 64, the pointer information of “m+1” to “n” is not limited to the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 but also to the first set unit character CHG1. Difference data is also set for the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth group unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. These difference data correspond to data in which the first collective unit character CHG1 is moved in one direction while maintaining its shape, and the second collective unit character CHG2 and the fourth collective unit character CHG4 maintain their shapes. It corresponds to the data that is moved in the direction opposite to the one direction as it is, and corresponds to the data that changes the shape of the third collective unit character CHG3 and the fifth collective unit character CHG5.

During the period in which such difference data is set, each group unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 65(b). Specifically, from the state where each of the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(b-1), the first to fifth group unit characters are displayed as shown in FIG. 65(b-2). The distance between the second collective unit character CHG2 and the third collective unit character CHG3 and the distance between the fourth collective unit character CHG4 and the fifth collective unit character CHG5 while moving in one direction as a whole of CHG1 to CHG5. And the shapes of the third collective unit character CHG3 and the fifth collective unit character CHG5 are changed.

Next, the data amounts of the set skin data SKD2 and the set texture data BTD2 will be described.

The common set skin data SKD2 is set for the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and the common set texture data BTD2 is set. That is, the group skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of one group unit character CHG1 to CHG5. Furthermore, the skin data for collection SKD2 is set as data to be applied to the 10 bone data. When the collective skin data SKD2 is applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first to fifth collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the one collective skin data SKD2 read from the memory module 133 is first. It is applied to each of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

The coordinate data of each vertex data ATD of the set skin data SKD2 for performing the application is determined by referring to the set skin weight data SWD2 stored in the memory module 133. In the set skin weight data SWD2, the correspondence between the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 and the set skin data SKD2, the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2 and the set skin data SKD2. , The bone data ABD21 to ABD30 of the third set unit character CHG3 and the set skin data SKD2, and the bone data ABD31 to ABD40 of the fourth set unit character CHG4 and the set skin data SKD2. , And the correspondence between the bone data ABD41 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit character CHG5 and the set skin data SKD2.

In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set of skeleton data FRD2, the set skin data SKD2 is the bone data of one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. By being set as data applied to ABD1 to ABD50, the skin data SKD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 63(b-1) and 63(b-2). On the other hand, the skin data for collection SKD2 has a data amount of 1/5.

Similarly, for the set texture data BTD2, the set texture data BTD2 is set as data applied to one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. When the set texture data BTD2 is applied to display the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the one set texture data BTD2 read from the memory module 133 is the first to fifth set unit characters. It is applied to each of CHG1 to CHG5. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 63(c-1) and 63(c-2), the texture data for collection BTD2 is 1/5 of the texture data BTD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10. It is the amount of data.

In the calculation processing for bone model display effect (FIG. 58), when the coordinate data of the bone data of a plurality of bone display characters is calculated, the data corresponding to the bone data included in one skeleton data is calculated as the coordinate of the work RAM 132. After being collectively read to the use area 169 and the calculation of the coordinate data for these bone data is completed, the coordinate data of the bone data is calculated for the next skeleton data. As a result, the coordinate data is calculated in units of one skeleton data, and various settings for calculating the coordinate data of the bone data included in one skeleton data are executed in multiple times. In comparison, it is possible to reduce the processing load in that the number of times the processes of steps S2808 and S2809 are executed can be suppressed.

Regarding a plurality of group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 that do not require fine movement control, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each group unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is suppressed to be small, and the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are one. It is set collectively in the skeleton data for collection FRD2. As a result, when the coordinate data of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the plurality of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is calculated, the coordinate calculation of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 can be performed collectively, and the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. It is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with a configuration in which various settings for calculating coordinate data are performed for each.

In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are set to the second to fifth sets. The parent data is set to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. As a result, all of the first to fifth group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are integrally moved only by setting coordinate data for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first group unit character CHG1 in the group bone animation data BAD2. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to integrally move the first to fifth group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 while reducing the data amount of the group bone animation data BAD2. On the other hand, it is possible to adjust the coordinate data of the child-targeted bone data ABD11 to ABD50 while not affecting the coordinate data of the parent-targeted bone data ABD1 to ABD10. As a result, all of the first to fifth group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 can be integrally moved only by setting the coordinate data for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first group unit character CHG1 as described above. However, the display positions of the second to fifth group unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 can be individually changed.

The set skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and the same set skin data SKD2 is applied to each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to store the skin data in advance. Similarly, the set texture data BTD2 is set as data applied to one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and the same set texture data BTD2 is applied to each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. It This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity required to store the texture data in advance.

<Another form of configuration related to bone model display presentation>
The total number of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be smaller than or larger than the total number of the bone data BOD of the bone display character CH10. The total number of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be smaller than the number of unit calculation areas of the coordinate calculation area 169.

The relationship between the parent object and the child object may be set between the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. In this case, it is possible to more realistically represent the action of each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

The relationship between the parent object and the child object may be set between the bone data included in the first skeleton data and the bone data included in the second skeleton data. In this case, when one of the character displayed by the first skeleton data and the character displayed by the second skeleton data is moved, the other character can be moved following the movement. ..

The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 and the arrangement mode are not limited to the same in each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and at least one of the number and arrangement mode of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is different. However, the number and arrangement mode may be substantially the same.

Parameter information calculated collectively for a plurality of individual images after the setting to the pre-derivation state in steps S2808 and S2809 in the calculation processing for bone model display effect in the display CPU 131 (FIG. 58) is coordinate data of skeleton data. However, it may be other parameter information such as rotation angle, scale, light information, and camera information.

<Configuration for performing plane shadow display>
Next, a configuration for performing plane shadow display will be described. 66(a) and 66(b) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the plane shadow display. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the memory module 133 necessary for performing the plane shadow display.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), the plane shadow display means that the player character CH11, which is recognized by the player as representing a person having a face, a body, both hands, and both legs, walks. The display content is to display the shadow image CH12 of the effect character CH11 with respect to the ground image BG representing the ground in a situation where a moving image display is being performed. The display content of the shadow image CH12 changes according to the movement of the effect character CH11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(a), in the display content in which the effect character CH11 puts out the left arm in front and the right arm in back, a shadow image CH12 having a shape corresponding to that is displayed, and FIG. In the display content in which the production character CH11 puts out the right arm in the front and the left arm comes out in the rear as shown in (), a shadow image CH12 having a corresponding shape is displayed.

As image data for displaying the effect character CH11, as shown in FIG. 67, character object data COD and character texture data CTD are stored in advance in the memory module 133. Further, as the image data for displaying the ground image BG, the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD are stored in advance in the memory module 133. Further, as the image data for displaying the shadow image CH12, the plate object data for plane shadow BSD and the texture data for plane shadow BST1 and BST2 are stored in the memory module 133 in advance.

At the time of displaying the shadow image CH12, the plane shadow plate object data BSD in the world coordinate system are the character object data COD for displaying the effect character CH11 and the ground object data BGD for displaying the ground image BG. Placed between. The planar object data BSD for plane shadows is object data that is configured in a flat plane shape without a wall thickness and has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface than a normal object having a wall thickness for displaying a character such as a person. is there. Then, by applying the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 for displaying the shadow image CH12 to the plane shadow plate object data BSD, the shadow image CH12 is displayed.

The plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is arranged at a position spaced apart by a distance X (specifically, one pixel) from the ground object data BGD in the world coordinate system, and the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD. Character object data COD is arranged above the object data BSD. By arranging the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD at a position separated upward from the ground object data BGD in this manner, the shadow image CH12 is reliably displayed above the ground image BG. A plurality of types of plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are set, and specifically, the first plane shadow texture data BST1 for displaying the shadow image CH12 having the shape shown in FIG. The second plane shadow texture data BST2 for displaying the shadow image CH12 having the shape shown in b) is set.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the plane shadow display will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for plane shadow display executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation processing for the plane shadow display is executed by the effect calculation processing in step S2209 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The calculation processing for plane shadow display is started when information about plane shadow display is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is the start timing of the plane shadow display (step S3101: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the plane shadow display is grasped (step S3102). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate object data BSD, first plane shadow texture data BST1 and second image data. The plane shadow texture data BST2 is included. After that, in step S3103, the start designation information of the plane shadow display for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the plane shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

If a negative determination is made in step S3101 or the process of step S3103 is executed, in step S3104, based on the currently set execution target table, the ground object data BGD and the ground object data are used as the current use target data. Grasp the texture data BGTD. Then, with respect to the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD, parameter information is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in an area secured corresponding to these image data BGD and BGTD. (Step S3105). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is updated so that the ground image BG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

In step S3106, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in an area secured in correspondence with the image data COD, CTD. (Step S3107). In this case, the character CH11 for effect is displayed as if moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 66(a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 66(b). The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the object data COD for use is updated.

After that, in step S3108, the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is grasped as the currently used data based on the currently set execution target table. In a succeeding step S3109, it is determined whether or not the update timing of this time is the first shadow display period. The first shadow display period is a period in which the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is used as the texture data for displaying the shadow image CH12, and the second shadow display period is the texture data for displaying the shadow image CH12. This is a period during which the second plane shadow texture data BST2 is used. If it is the first shadow display period (step S3109: YES), the texture data BST1 for the first plane shadow is grasped in step S3110, and if it is the second shadow display period (step S3109: NO), step S3111. The texture data BST2 for the second plane shadow is grasped.

The first shadow display period and the second shadow display period are image data for displaying the shadow image CH12 when the effect character CH11 is in the first display mode as shown in FIG. 66(a). To display the shadow image CH12 when the first plane shadow texture data BST1 corresponding to the first display mode is used and the effect character CH11 is in the second display mode as shown in FIG. 66(b). The second plane shadow texture data BST2 corresponding to the second display mode is set to be used as the image data. That is, when the display character CH11 is displayed so as to move, when the display mode is alternately switched between the first display mode and the second display mode, the usage target is switched in accordance with the switching of the display mode. The texture data BST1 and BST2 for plane shadows are switched.

When the process of step S3110 is executed or the process of step S3111 is executed, in step S3112, the parameter information of the planar shadow plate object data BSD and the planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 to be used this time is set. It is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with these image data BSD, BST1, BST2. Thereafter, in step S3113, plane shadow display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the plane shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

In this case, as the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the planar shadow plate object data BSD, a shadow image CH12 can be displayed below the effect character CH11 as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b). As much as possible, the coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of the character object data COD grasped in step S3107 is grasped. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the ground which is grasped in step S3105 so that the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is arranged at a position apart from the ground image BG by one pixel. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data BGD.

Here, as already described, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are applied to the plane shadow plate object data BSD, but the application position is determined using the UV coordinate data. In detail, the base UV coordinate data is set in the plane object plate object data BSD, and the UV coordinate data is set in the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2. Then, the color information of the plane shadow texture data BST1, BST2 is applied so that the UV coordinate data of the plane shadow texture data BST1, BST2 correspond to the base UV coordinate data of the plane shadow plate object data BSD. In this case, since the UV coordinate data is set as fixed data in the planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2, the display CPU 131 cannot change the UV coordinate data. On the other hand, the base UV coordinate data of the plate object data for flat shadow BSD can be changed in the display CPU 131, but the base UV coordinate data is not changed during the execution period of the flat shadow display. For example, the base UV coordinate data and the UV coordinate data are constant during both the first shadow display period and the second shadow display period. As a result, even if the effect character CH11 is displayed so as to move and the coordinate data of the plate object data for plane shadow BSD is changed accordingly, the plane shadow in each pixel of the plate object data for plane shadow BSD is changed. The application target of the texture data for BST1 and BST2 is not changed.

When the calculation processing for plane shadow display is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609), the character object data COD, the character texture data CTD, Information on the use instruction of the ground object data BGD, the ground texture data BGTD, and the plane shadow plate object data BSD is set, and the use instruction of the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is set during the first shadow display period. Is set, and if it is the second shadow display period, information on the use instruction of the second plane shadow texture data BST2 is set. Further, parameter information applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. Further, the plane shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, and the plane shadow display start designation information is set at the start timing of the plane shadow display.

Next, the setting process for the plane shadow display executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The plane shadow display setting process is executed as a part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the plane shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, the plane shadow display setting process is executed.

When the plane shadow display start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S3201: YES), it is the display target of this time in the memory module 133 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address where the various image data are stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, the various image data are read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S3202). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate object data BSD, first plane shadow texture data BST1 and second image data. The plane shadow texture data BST2 is included.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, or if the process of step S3202 is executed, in step S3203, the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD are grasped as display target data based on the drawing list this time. .. In step S3204, the parameter information of the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD is grasped based on the drawing list this time. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is grasped.

After that, in step S3205, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are grasped as display target data based on the drawing list this time. Further, in step S3206, the parameter information of the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD is grasped based on the drawing list this time. In this case, in order to display the effect character CH11 as if moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 66(a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 66(b). Various parameter information including the coordinate data of each pixel in the character object data COD in the world coordinate system is grasped.

After that, in step S3207, the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is grasped as the data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. In step S3208, the coordinate data of the plate-shaped object data for plane shadow BSD is grasped based on the drawing list this time. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), the coordinates of each pixel in the plane shadow plate object data BSD for displaying the shadow image CH12 below the effect character CH11 in the world coordinate system. Understand the data. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the ground which is grasped in step S3204 so that the plane-shaped plate-shaped object data BSD is arranged at a position separated by 1 pixel on the side away from the ground image BG. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data BGD. Further, in step S3209, parameter information other than the coordinate data of the plate object data for plane shadow BSD is grasped based on the drawing list this time. In this case, the fixed base UV coordinate data applied to the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is grasped based on the drawing list.

After that, in step S3210, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 corresponding to the current shadow display period are grasped as display target data based on the current drawing list. In step S3211, fixed UV coordinate data applied to the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is grasped from the texture data BST1 and BST2. In step S3212, parameter information other than the UV coordinate data applied to the planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is grasped based on the drawing list this time.

After that, in step S3213, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasping result of steps S3203 to S3212.

By executing the setting process for the plane shadow display as described above, the ground object data BGD, the character object data COD, and the plane shadow plate object data BSD are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the display CPU 131 The various parameter information including the coordinate data derived by the calculation is applied to each object data BGD, COD, BSD. Further, corresponding texture data BGTD, CTD, BST1, BST2 is applied to each object data BGD, COD, BSD. As a result, on the display surface P, as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, a moving image display in which the effect character CH11 is walking and moving on the ground image BG is performed and the effect is displayed. A moving image is displayed such that the shadow image CH12 deforms and follows along with the movement of the character CH11.

When the shadow image CH12 is displayed so as to follow the effect character CH11 as described above, the planar shadow plate object data BSD is arranged below the character object data COD, and the planar shadow plate object is placed. This is a configuration in which the texture data for plane shadows BST1 and BST2 are applied to the data BSD. As a result, the processing load can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the shadow image is displayed by calculation in relation to the light source data. A configuration is also conceivable in which the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are directly applied to the ground object data BGD, but since the ground texture data BGTD is applied to the ground object data BGD, the shadow image CH12 If the player tries to move the character following the effect character CH11, the relationship between the base UV coordinate data and the UV coordinate data becomes complicated. On the other hand, the position of the plane-shaped plate object data BSD is changed corresponding to the change of the position of the character object data COD, and the plane-shaped plate texture object data BSD is changed to the plane-shaped texture data. With the configuration in which BST1 and BST2 are applied, the shadow image CH12 can be displayed without causing such an inconvenience.

In a configuration in which object data is provided separately from the ground object data BGD for displaying the shadow image CH12, the planar shadow plate object data BSD is the planar shadow plate object data configured in a flat plane with no thickness. It is BSD. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity required to store the image data in the memory module 133 in advance.

The plate-shaped object data BSD for plane shadow is arranged at a position separated by one pixel from the object data BGD for ground. As a result, the shadow image CH12 can be displayed without being buried in the ground image BG.

In the configuration in which the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed in accordance with the change of the display mode of the effect character CH11, a plurality of plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are provided and used in correspondence with the display mode of the effect character CH11. The target plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are changed. This makes it possible to change the shape of the shadow image CH12 while reducing the processing load.

<Another form of configuration related to plane shadow display>
In the above embodiment, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed according to the change in the display mode of the effect character CH11 by changing the types of the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 applied to the plane shadow plate object data BSD. However, in the present alternative embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B, the type of the plane shadow texture data BST3 applied to the plane shadow plate object data BSD is changed. Instead, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed by changing the shape of the plate-shaped object data for flat shadow BSD.

Hereinafter, the processing configuration for changing the shape of the shadow image CH12 by changing the shape of the planar shadow plate object data BSD will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for plane shadow display, which is executed by the display CPU 131 in this another embodiment.

If it is the start timing of the plane shadow display (step S3301: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the plane shadow display is grasped (step S3302). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate object data BSD, and plane shadow texture data BST3. After that, in step S3303, the start designation information of the plane shadow display for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the plane shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

If a negative determination is made in step S3301 or the process of step S3303 is executed, in step S3304, based on the currently set execution target table, the object data for ground BGD and the data for ground are used as the data of the current use target. Grasp the texture data BGTD. Then, with respect to the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD, the parameter information is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in an area secured corresponding to these image data BGD and BGTD. (Step S3305). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is updated so that the ground image BG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

In step S3306, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in an area secured in correspondence with the image data COD, CTD. (Step S3307). In this case, the character CH11 for effect is displayed as if moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 70(a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 70(b). The coordinate data of each pixel of the object data COD for use in the world coordinate system is updated.

Then, in step S3308, the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. In a succeeding step S3309, it is determined whether or not the update timing of this time is the first shadow display period. During the first shadow display period, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is set so that the shape of the shadow image CH12 becomes the first shape mode corresponding to the first display mode of the effect character CH11. In the second shadow display period, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the shape of the shadow image CH12 corresponds to the second display mode of the effect character CH11 in the period in which the first shape data is used as the shape data to be applied. It is a period in which the second shape data is used as the shape data applied to the plate-shaped object data for plane shadow BSD so as to have the two-shape mode. If it is the first shadow display period (step S3309: YES), the first shape data is grasped at step S3310, and if it is the second shadow display period (step S3309: NO), the second shape data is obtained at step S3311. Figure out. The shape data grasped in step S3310 or step S3311 is written in the work RAM 132 in an area secured in correspondence with the planar shadow plate object data BSD and the planar shadow texture data BST3.

When the process of step S3310 has been executed or the process of step S3311 has been executed, in step S3312, the plane shadow texture data BST3 is grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. .. After that, in step S3313, with respect to the planar shadow plate object data BSD and the planar shadow texture data BSD3, parameter information other than the shape data of the planar shadow plate object data BSD is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information. Is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the image data BSD and BST3. After that, in step S3314, the plane display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the plane shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

According to the above-described another embodiment, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed by changing the shape of the planar shadow plate object data BSD instead of changing the type of the planar shadow texture data BST3. It is possible to change the shape of the shadow image CH12 according to the display mode of the effect character CH11 while suppressing the data capacity required to store the plane shadow texture data BST3 in advance.

<Still another form of configuration relating to plane shadow display>
In the configuration in which the texture data for plane shadow BST1 and BST2 are provided corresponding to each display mode of the effect character CH11, the first display mode as the display mode when the effect character CH11 is displayed to move. In addition to the second display mode, a display mode corresponding to the operation path between these display modes may be present. In this case, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. According to such a configuration, the display mode of the shadow image CH12 is displayed by the effect character CH11. It is possible to make detailed correspondence to the aspect. On the other hand, for each display mode (including the first display mode) included in the first display mode group corresponding to the predetermined first operation period, the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is used as a target, and the predetermined second The second plane mode texture data BST2 may be used for each display mode (including the second display mode) included in the second display mode group corresponding to the operation period. In this case, it is possible to make the display mode of the shadow image CH12 correspond to the display mode of the effect character CH11 to some extent while suppressing the data capacity for storing the planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 in advance.

In a configuration in which the shape data of the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is provided in correspondence with each display mode of the effect character CH11, the display mode is as a display mode when the effect character CH11 is displayed to move. In addition to the 1st display mode and the 2nd display mode, a display mode corresponding to an operation path between these display modes may be present. In this case, the shape data of the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode, whereby the display mode of the shadow image CH12 is displayed by the effect character CH11. It becomes possible to make detailed correspondence to the aspect. On the other hand, the first shape data is used for each display mode (including the first display mode) included in the first display mode group corresponding to the predetermined first operation period, and corresponding to the predetermined second operation period. The second shape data may be used for each display mode (including the second display mode) included in the second display mode group. In this case, it becomes possible to make the display mode of the shadow image CH12 correspond to the display mode of the effect character CH11 to some extent while suppressing the data capacity for storing the shape data in advance.

The object data provided separately from the ground object data BGD for displaying the shadow image CH12 is not limited to the plate-like object data, and has a solid three-dimensional shape like the character object data COD. The object data may be the created object data.

A configuration for displaying the shadow image CH12 of the effect character CH11 using object data provided separately from the ground object data BGD, and displaying a reflection image showing how the effect character CH11 is reflected on the water surface. You may use it to do.

<Structure for displaying step shadows>
Next, a configuration for performing step shadow display will be described. 72A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the step shadow display, and FIG. 72B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 133 necessary for performing the step shadow display. is there.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), the step shadow display is a moving image in which the effect character CH13, which is recognized by the player as representing a person having a face, a body, both hands, and feet, moves using stairs. The display content is for displaying the shadow image CH14 of the effect character CH13 on the staircase image SG representing the stairs in the situation where the display is being performed. In this case, the shadow image CH14 is displayed along the staircase shape. Specifically, the shadow image CH14 is displayed from one tread surface to the tread surface immediately below the tread surface, and the shadow image CH14 has a step shape corresponding to the stepped portion caused by the kicking up between the tread surfaces. Is displayed.

The display content of the shadow image CH14 changes according to the movement of the effect character CH13. Specifically, as the effect character CH13 climbs up the stairs, the range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on one tread changes, and the type of the tread to be displayed for the shadow image CH14 also changes. For example, in a situation in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed in a step shape over two consecutive treads and a kick that connects the two treads to each other, the lower part of the lower side is displayed as the effect character CH13 moves up the stairs. The range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the tread gradually decreases, and the range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the upper tread gradually increases. Then, via the state in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed over the upper tread surface and the kicking that is continuous to the tread surface, a part of the shadow image CH14 is displayed in the upper tread surface.

As image data for displaying the effect character CH13, character object data COD1 and character texture data CTD1 are stored in advance in the memory module 133, as shown in FIG. 72(b). Further, as the image data for displaying the staircase image SG, the staircase object data SGD and the staircase texture data SGTD are stored in advance in the memory module 133. Further, as image data for displaying the shadow image CH14, the step shadow plate object data SSD and the step shadow texture data SST are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

When displaying the shadow image CH14, the plate object data for step shadow SSD in the world coordinate system includes the character object data COD1 for displaying the effect character CH13 and the stair object data SGD for displaying the staircase image SG. Placed between. The plate object data for step shadow SSD is an object in which a flat object having no wall thickness is formed into a step shape in accordance with the shape of the stairs, and is a normal object having a wall thickness for displaying a character such as a person. This is object data in which the number of polygons per unit display surface is smaller than that of the other. The stepped shadow plate-shaped object data SSD is set to a size smaller than the staircase object data SGD, and corresponds to a part of the staircase portion displayed by the staircase image SG in which the shadow image CH14 can be displayed. Is set. Then, the shadow image CH14 is displayed by applying the step shadow texture data SST to the step shadow plate object data SSD.

The step shadow plate object data SSD is arranged at a position separated by a predetermined distance (specifically, one pixel) from the staircase object data SGD in the world coordinate system, and the step shadow plate object data SSD is arranged. Character object data COD1 is arranged above the object data SSD. By arranging the plate object data for step shadow SSD at a position separated above the staircase object data SGD in this manner, the shadow image CH14 is reliably displayed above the staircase image SG.

Only one type of step shadow texture data SST is set. When the shadow image CH14 is moved in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13, the position where the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate object data SSD is adjusted in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13. Change. Specifically, when the predetermined color information of the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate object data SSD, the base UV coordinate data corresponding to the UV coordinate data set in the color information is set. In the configuration in which the color information is applied to the pixels of the stepped shadow plate object data SSD, by changing the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate object data SSD in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13. The position to which the step shadow texture data SST is applied changes in the step shadow plate object data SSD. For example, for the pixels of the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD whose base UV coordinate data is set to (1,1), the step shadow texture data whose UV coordinate data is set to (1,1) In the configuration in which the color information of SST is applied, by changing the pixel whose base UV coordinate data is set to (1, 1), the texture for step shadow is compared with the plate object data for step shadow SSD. The position to which the data SST is applied will change. The base UV coordinate data of the plate object data for step shadow SSD can be changed in the display CPU 131, but the UV coordinate data is set as fixed data in the texture data for step shadow SST, so it is changed in the display CPU 131. I can't.

As data for changing the base UV coordinate data of the plate object data for step shadow SSD at each image update timing, the UV coordinate animation data UAD is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as shown in FIG. 72(b). Has been done. In the UV coordinate animation data UAD, the base UV coordinates of the stepped shadow plate-shaped object data SSD are associated with each update timing in a one-to-one correspondence during the period in which the effect character CH13 is displayed as a moving image on the stairs. Data for changing the data is set. The data to be changed means that the base UV coordinate data set in each pixel of the plate object data for step shadow SSD is shifted by the same amount in a certain direction with respect to each base UV coordinate data. It is the data of the value to be added. By using the UV coordinate animation data UAD, the base UV coordinate data of each pixel of the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD is deviated by the same amount in a certain direction at each update timing. By applying the step shadow texture data SST using constant UV coordinate data at each update timing, the shadow image CH14 is moved and displayed while deviating by the same amount in a constant direction at each update timing. Become.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for performing step shadow display will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for displaying a step shadow performed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for displaying the step shadow is executed by the calculation process for effect in step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for displaying the step shadow is started when the information about the step shadow display is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the start timing of step shadow display (step S3401: YES), the UV coordinate animation data UAD is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S3402). Further, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying the step shadow is grasped (step S3403). The image data includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, stair object data SGD, stair texture data SGTD, step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SST. After that, in step S3404, the step shadow display start designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the step shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401 or the process of step S3404 is executed, in step S3405, based on the currently set execution target table, the object data SGD for stairs and the staircase are used as the data to be used this time. Understand the texture data SGTD. Then, with respect to the staircase object data SGD and the staircase texture data SGTD, parameter information is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the image data SGD, SGTD. (Step S3406). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the staircase object data SGD is updated so that the staircase image SG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

In step S3407, the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1 are grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the image data COD1, CTD1. (Step S3408). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD1 is updated so that the manner in which the effect character CH13 climbs the stairs is displayed as a moving image (see FIG. 72A).

After that, in step S3409, the plate-shaped object data for step shadow SSD is grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. In a succeeding step S3410, the increased amount of the base UV coordinate data corresponding to the update timing of this time is read from the UV coordinate animation data UAD already read in the work RAM 132, and the read data is used as the current base UV coordinate data. By adding, the base UV coordinate data corresponding to the update timing of this time is derived. Then, the derived base UV coordinate data is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the plate object data for step shadow SSD.

After that, in step S3411, the step shadow texture data SST is grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. In a succeeding step S3412, parameter information other than the base UV coordinate data in the plate object data for step shadow SSD and parameter information of the texture data for step shadow SST are calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is stored in the work RAM 132 as these images. The data is written in the area secured corresponding to the data SSD and SST. Thereafter, in step S3413, step shadow display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the step shadow display execution period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

In this case, as the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the plate object data for step shadow SSD, the character object data grasped in step S3408 so that the shadow image CH12 can be displayed below the effect character CH11. The coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of COD1 is grasped. Further, the coordinate data to be grasped in this case is for the stairs grasped in step S3406 so that the plate object data for step shadow SSD is arranged at a position one pixel away from the staircase image SG. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data SGD.

When the calculation process for displaying the step shadow is executed as described above, the character object data COD1, the character texture data CTD1, and the character texture data CTD1 are included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609). Information on the use instruction of the staircase object data SGD, the staircase texture data SGTD, the step shadow plate object data SSD, and the step shadow texture data SST is set. Further, parameter information applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. Further, step shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, and step shadow display start designation information is set at the start timing of step shadow display.

Next, the setting process for displaying the step shadow executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The step shadow display setting process is executed as a part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the step shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, the step shadow display setting process is executed.

When the step shadow display start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S3501: YES), it is the display target of this time in the memory module 133 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area in which various image data are stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, various image data are read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S3502). The image data includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, stair object data SGD, stair texture data SGTD, step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SST.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, or if the process of step S3502 is executed, in step S3503, the staircase object data SGD and staircase texture data SGTD are grasped as display target data based on the drawing list this time. .. Further, in step S3504, the parameter information of the data SGD and SGTD is grasped based on the drawing list this time. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the staircase object data SGD is grasped.

After that, in step S3505, the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1 are grasped as display target data based on the drawing list of this time. Further, in step S3506, the parameter information of the data COD1 and CTD1 is grasped based on the drawing list this time. In this case, various parameter information including coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD1 is displayed so that the manner in which the effect character CH13 climbs the stairs is displayed as a moving image (see FIG. 72A). To figure out.

After that, in step S3507, the plate object data for step shadow SSD is grasped as the data to be displayed based on the drawing list this time. Further, in step S3508, the base UV coordinate data of the plate object data for step shadow SSD is grasped based on the drawing list this time, and in step S3509, other parameter information applied to the data SSD is grasped. In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the step shadow plate object data SSD for displaying the shadow image CH14 below the effect character CH13 is grasped. The coordinate data grasped in this case is for the stairs grasped in step S3504 so that the plate object data for step shadow SSD is arranged at a position apart from the staircase image SG by one pixel. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data SGD.

After that, in step S3510, the step shadow texture data SST is grasped as the data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. In step S3511, the fixed UV coordinate data of the step shadow texture data SST is grasped from the texture data SST, and in step S3512, other parameter information to be applied to the texture data SST is drawn in this drawing list. Grasp based on.

After that, in step S3513, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasping result in steps S3503 to S3512.

By executing the setting process for displaying the step shadow as described above, the staircase object data SGD, the character object data COD1, and the step shadow plate object data SSD are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the display CPU 131 Various parameter information including the coordinate data derived by the calculation is applied to each object data SGD, COD1, SSD. Further, corresponding texture data SGTD, CTD1, SST is applied to each object data SGD, COD1, SSD. As a result, on the display surface P, as shown in FIG. 72(a), a moving image is displayed in which the effect character CH13 is moving on the stairs of the staircase image SG, and the moving character CH13 is moved. A moving image is displayed such that the shadow image CH14 follows the shape of the stairs while deforming.

In the configuration in which the effect character CH13 is displayed so as to move on the stairs as described above, the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate object data SSD formed according to the shape of the stairs. The shadow image CH14 is displayed by. As a result, the shadow image CH14 can be displayed so as to follow the shape of the stairs.

By setting the plate object data for step shadow SSD in correspondence with the entire range in which the shadow image CH14 can be displayed on the stairs, and changing the base UV coordinate data of the plate object data for step shadow SSD, the shadow image CH14 of the shadow image CH14 is changed. By changing the display position, the data capacity required to store the image data can be increased as compared with the structure in which a plurality of kinds of step shadow plate object data corresponding to each display position of the shadow image CH14 is prepared. It is possible to reduce.

Instead of applying the step shadow texture data SST to the staircase object data SGD, the step shadow plate object data SSD is separately set and the step shadow texture data SST is applied, whereby the base UV coordinate data is obtained. It is possible to prevent the display position of the staircase texture data SGTD from being affected when the display position of the shadow image CH14 is changed by changing.

<Another form of configuration related to step shadow display>
The structure for changing the display position of the image by changing the base UV coordinate data of the object data without changing the UV coordinate data of the texture is used to display the planar shadow image CH12 already described. Good. In this case, the size of the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is not made to correspond to the entire size of the ground object data BGD, but to the partial range in which the shadow image CH12 can be displayed in the ground object data BGD. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the plate object data for flat shadow BSD.

If the display CPU 131 can change the texture UV coordinate data, the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the staircase object data SGD without using the step shadow plate object data SSD. May be In this case, after applying the staircase texture data SGTD to the staircase object data SGD, the step shadow texture data SST is applied so as to overwrite the position corresponding to the UV coordinate data set in the display CPU 131. According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity in that the plate-shaped object data for step shadow SSD is not necessary, and the relationship with the UV coordinate data can be achieved without changing the base UV coordinate data of the object data. With this, it is possible to perform movement display along the staircase shape of the shadow image CH14.

The object data provided separately from the staircase object data SGD for displaying the shadow image CH14 is not limited to the plate-like object data, and has a thick solid shape like the character object data COD1. The object data may be the created object data.

-A configuration for displaying the shadow image CH14 of the effect character CH13 using object data provided separately from the staircase object data SGD, and displaying a reflection image showing how the effect character CH13 is reflected on the water surface. You may use it to do.

<Structure for performing variable display production>
Next, a configuration for performing the variable display effect will be described. FIG. 75(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the variable display effect, and FIG. 75(b) is for explaining the configuration of the area used when executing the variable display effect in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. FIG.

The variable display effect is, as shown in FIG. 75(a), before the effect character CH15, which is recognized by the player that a person having a face, a body, both hands, and feet is represented, is displayed in a moving manner. And a plurality of symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are variably displayed. In the variable display effect, three types of the first symbol display portion CH16, the second symbol display portion CH17 and the third symbol display portion CH18 are variably displayed, but the number of symbol display portions may be one or the other. There may be a plurality. The respective symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 have the same external shape, and the effect symbols are attached to the respective surfaces lined up in the circling direction. While the types of effect symbols lined up in the orbiting direction in one symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 are all different, the types of effect symbols set in the respective symbol display units CH16 to CH18 are the same.

The variable display effect is executed as an promotion effect in the opening/closing execution mode. The promotion effect is an effect that can occur in both the normal jackpot result and the 15R high-accuracy jackpot result. Specifically, at the end of the game diversion effect, while the final stop display of a combination of even symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result on the symbol display device 41, the jackpot result that triggered this opening and closing execution mode is If the 15R high-accuracy jackpot result is given, the high-accuracy corresponding effect is performed during the opening/closing execution mode, and if the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result, then the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. It is a production in which a low accuracy corresponding production is performed. The variation display effect is started during the opening/closing execution mode, and if it is the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 15R high-precision jackpot result, the same effect symbol is used when the variable display of the plurality of symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is stopped. Is displayed in a stopped state, and if it is an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the normal jackpot result, a combination of the same effect symbols is not stopped and displayed when the variable display of the plurality of symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is stopped.

When the variable display effect is executed, each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is displayed translucently for at least a predetermined period. In this case, each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is displayed as a three-dimensional image using the object data and the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 133, but the object data is directly translucent. If applied, the image on the back side of the object data set as the stereoscopic data may be seen as it is. On the other hand, the object data for displaying each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is not subjected to the translucency process, but the two-dimensional drawing of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 created separately from the effect character CH15. By making the data semi-transparent and superimposing it on the two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the effect character CH15, as shown in FIG. 75(a), in front of the effect character CH15. The semi-transparent symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are variably displayed.

In order to perform the display control, the rendering buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 has a drawing buffer BF1, a first storage buffer BF2, a second storage buffer BF3, and a third storage buffer BF1, as shown in FIG. A buffer for storage BF4 and a buffer for fourth storage BF5 are provided. In each of these buffers BF1 to BF5, the same number of unit areas as the respective frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 are set, and 1 byte is assigned to each RGB color in each unit area. Therefore, drawing data similar to the drawing data drawn in the frame areas 142a and 142b can be drawn in each of the buffers BF1 to BF5. In addition to the areas of each color of RBG, a 1-byte area for setting an α value is set in each unit area.

The drawing buffer BF1 is used when drawing two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the effect character CH15 and two-dimensional drawing data for displaying each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. The first storage buffer BF2 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the effect character CH15 created by using the drawing buffer BF1. The second storage buffer BF3 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the first symbol display portion CH16 created by using the drawing buffer BF1. The third storage buffer BF4 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the second symbol display portion CH17 created by using the drawing buffer BF1. The fourth storage buffer BF5 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the third symbol display portion CH18 created by using the drawing buffer BF1.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the variable display effect will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the variable display effect executed by the display CPU 131. The variable display effect calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process of step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for the variable display effect is started when the information about the variable display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is the start timing of the variable display effect (step S3601: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the variable display effect is grasped (step S3602). The image data includes character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display portion CH16, and second. The object data for symbols and the texture data for symbols for displaying the symbol display portion CH17, and the object data for symbols and the texture data for symbols for displaying the third symbol display portion CH18 are included. After that, in step S3603, the start designation information of the variable display effect for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the variable display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

If a negative determination is made in step S3601 or the processing of step S3603 is executed, in step S3604, the effect character CH15 is displayed as the currently used data based on the currently set execution target table. Understand the character object data and the character texture data. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data and the character texture data, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in an area secured corresponding to these image data (step S3605). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data is updated so that the display content is such that it is recognized that the effect character CH15 is running toward the front side of the display surface P.

In step S3606, the object data for each symbol and the texture data for each symbol for displaying each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 are grasped as the data of the current use target based on the currently set execution target table. To do. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the design object data and each of the design texture data, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in an area secured corresponding to these image data (step S3607). ). In this case, in the world coordinate system of each pixel of each symbol object data, each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 has a display content that is recognized as rotating in a predetermined direction in front of the effect character CH15. The coordinate data is updated. Further, the α value applied to each of the symbol object data in the entire period of the variable display effect is set to opaque information that does not allow images that overlap on the back side of the display surface P to pass through.

Then, in step S3608, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not it is a translucent period in which each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is displayed in a translucent state. If it is the semi-transparent period (step S3608: YES), the semi-transparent value data is grasped based on the currently set execution target table in step S3609. In step S3610, the semitransparent designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize the semitransparent period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S3608 or when the processing of step S3610 is executed, in step S3611, the variable display effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the variable display effect is displayed by the display CPU 131. Store in register.

When the variable display effect calculation processing is executed as described above, the character object for displaying the effect character CH15 is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609). Texture data for data and characters, object data for symbols for displaying the first symbol display section CH16 and texture data for symbols, and object data for symbols for displaying second symbol display section CH17 and texture data for symbols Then, the information of the instruction to use the symbol object data and the symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display portion CH18 is set. Further, parameter information applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. Further, the variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list, and further, the start designation information of the variable display effect is set at the start timing of the variable display effect, and the semitransparent designation information is set in the semitransparent period. It Furthermore, when the semitransparent designation information is set, the semitransparent value data is set in the drawing list.

Next, the setting process for the variable display effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variable display effect setting process is executed as a part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for variable display effect is executed.

When the variable display effect start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S3701: YES), it is the display target of this time in the memory module 133 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address at which various image data are stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, various image data are read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S3702). The image data includes character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display portion CH16, and second. The object data for symbols and the texture data for symbols for displaying the symbol display portion CH17, and the object data for symbols and the texture data for symbols for displaying the third symbol display portion CH18 are included.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701, or if the process of step S3702 is executed, in step S3703, character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15 based on the drawing list this time are displayed. Understand as data to be displayed. Further, in step S3704, the parameter information of the image data is grasped based on the drawing list this time. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data for making the display content that is recognized as the performance character CH15 running toward the front side of the display surface P is grasped.

Then, in step S3705, the object data for each symbol and the texture data for each symbol for displaying each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are grasped based on the drawing list this time. Further, in step S3706, the parameter information of the image data is grasped based on the drawing list this time. In this case, each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 grasps various parameter information including coordinate data for making the display content recognized to be rotating in a predetermined direction in front of the effect character CH15. In addition, as the α value applied to each pattern object data, opaque information that does not allow images that overlap on the back side of the display surface P to pass through is grasped.

After that, in step S3707, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasping result of step S3703 to step S3706. Thereby, in the world coordinate system, the object data of the effect character CH15, the first symbol, in a positional relationship that enables creation of drawing data corresponding to the image for variable display effect as shown in FIG. 75(a). Object data of the display unit CH16, object data of the second symbol display unit CH17 and object data of the third symbol display unit CH18 are set. That is, while the object data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are arranged in front of the object data of the effect character CH15, the object data of the first symbol display portion CH16 is arranged on the left and the second symbol display portion in the center. Object data of CH17 is arranged, and object data of the third symbol display portion CH18 is arranged on the right.

Next, the drawing data creation process for the variable display effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The drawing data creation process for the variable display effect is the drawing data creation process for effects and symbols executed in step S2311 of the drawing process (FIG. 44) when the variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list. Is executed as a part of the processing of.

In addition, in the following description, the explanatory views of FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c) and FIGS. 80(a) to 80(e) are appropriately referred to. 79(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing data of the first symbol display portion CH16 stored in the second storage buffer BF3, and FIG. 79(b) is stored in the third storage buffer BF4. It is an explanatory view for explaining the drawing data of the second symbol display portion CH17, and FIG. 79(c) is for explaining the drawing data of the third symbol display portion CH18 stored in the fourth storage buffer BF5. FIG. In addition, FIGS. 80(a) to 80(e) are explanations for explaining how the drawing data of the variable display effect image is created using the drawing data stored in the respective storage buffers BF2 to BF5. It is a figure.

First, in step S3801, initialization processing of the drawing buffer BF1 of the expansion buffer 141 is executed. In the initialization processing, each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is initialized. As a result, 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB is cleared to “0” in each unit area, and 1-byte data corresponding to the α value in each unit area is cleared to “0”. To be done.

In a succeeding step S3802, rendering processing of the effect character is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data corresponding to the effect character CH15 in the world coordinate system is masked to project only the object data onto the screen region PC12. Then, the drawing data after projection is written in the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is written in the unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the effect character CH15. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity, and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is maintained as data corresponding to complete transparency. After that, in step S3803, a saving process in the first saving buffer BF2 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3802 is stored as it is in the first storage buffer BF2.

In the following step S3804, the initialization processing of the drawing buffer BF1 is executed similarly to step S3801. As a result, the 1-byte data corresponding to each RGB color is cleared to "0" in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and the 1-byte data corresponding to the α value in each unit area is completely transparent. Is cleared to "0".

Then, in step S3805, the drawing process of the first symbol display portion is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking other than the object data corresponding to the first symbol display portion CH16 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written in the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, the display target data for displaying the first symbol display portion CH16 as shown in FIG. 79(a-1) is the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the first symbol display portion CH16. Written in the unit area. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity as shown in FIG. 79(a-2), and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is Maintained in data corresponding to full transparency. After that, in step S3806, a saving process to the second saving buffer BF3 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3805 is stored in the second storage buffer BF3 as it is.

In the following step S3807, the initialization process of the drawing buffer BF1 is executed similarly to step S3801. As a result, the 1-byte data corresponding to each RGB color is cleared to "0" in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and the 1-byte data corresponding to the α value in each unit area is completely transparent. Is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, in step S3808, drawing processing of the second symbol display portion is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected on the screen area PC12 by masking the object data other than the object data corresponding to the second symbol display portion CH17 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written in the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, the display target data for displaying the second symbol display portion CH17 as shown in FIG. 79(b-1) is the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the second symbol display portion CH17. Written in the unit area. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity as shown in FIG. 79(b-2), and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is Maintained in data corresponding to full transparency. After that, in step S3809, a storage process in the third storage buffer BF4 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the processing of step S3808 is stored in the third storage buffer BF4 as it is.

In the following step S3810, the initialization processing of the drawing buffer BF1 is executed similarly to step S3801. As a result, the 1-byte data corresponding to each RGB color is cleared to "0" in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and the 1-byte data corresponding to the α value in each unit area is completely transparent. Is cleared to "0".

Then, in step S3811, the drawing process of the third symbol display portion is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking other than the object data corresponding to the third symbol display portion CH18 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written in the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, the display target data for displaying the third symbol display portion CH18 as shown in FIG. 79(c-1) is the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the third symbol display portion CH18. Written in the unit area. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opaque as shown in FIG. 79(c-2), and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is Maintained in data corresponding to full transparency. After that, in step S3812, a saving process to the fourth saving buffer BF5 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3811 is stored in the fourth storage buffer BF5 as it is.

In subsequent step S3813, the drawing data stored in the first storage buffer BF2 is written in the effect and symbol buffers in the screen buffer 144. In this case, the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is written in the unit area of the effect and symbol buffer corresponding to the final display position of the effect character CH15. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity, and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is maintained as data corresponding to complete transparency.

After that, in step S3814, it is determined whether the semi-transparent designation information is set in the drawing list this time. If the semitransparent designation information is set, the semitransparent value data is read from the current drawing list in step S3815.

If a negative determination is made in step S3814 or if the process of step S3815 is executed, in step S3816, the rendering data stored in the second to fourth storage buffers BF3 to BF5 is rendered in the screen buffer 144. And write in the buffer for the design. In this case, the display target data for displaying the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 corresponding to each of the drawing data is the final effect corresponding to each display position of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18, and the buffer for symbols. Is written in the unit area of.

Here, when the process of step S3815 is not executed, the opaque α value is set to the corresponding display target data in each drawing data to be written, and the data other than the corresponding display target data is completely A transparent α value is set. Therefore, in the display target data for displaying the already-created effect character CH15, the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is directed to the portion overlapping with the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. The display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is maintained as it is with respect to the portions which are overwritten on the display target data of the display character CH15 and do not overlap with the display target data of the respective symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. In addition, in the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18, for a portion that does not overlap with the display target data of the effect character CH15, the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 has an opaque α value added. Is set by. In each unit area of the effect and symbol buffer, a completely transparent α value is set in the unit area in which neither the display target data of the effect character CH15 nor the display target data of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is written. It will be in a state of being.

On the other hand, when the process of step S3815 is executed, a semi-transparent α value (for example, “0.5”) is set in the corresponding display target data in each writing target writing data, and the corresponding In addition to the display target data, the completely transparent α value is set. Therefore, of the display target data that has already been written for displaying the effect character CH15, the former display target data and the latter display target data are the portions that overlap the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. The blending process is executed using the translucent α value. For example, the color information of the former display target data in a predetermined unit area is “r10, g10, b10”, the color information of the latter display target data is “r20, g20, b20”, and the translucent α value is If "α20" is set,
R: r10×(1−α20)+r20×α20
G: g10×(1-α20)+g20×α20
B: b10×(1−α20)+b20×α20
Becomes

Also, among the display target data for displaying the already-produced effect character CH15, the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is displayed for the portions that do not overlap with the display target data of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. Is maintained as is. Further, in the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18, the translucent α value is added to the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 in a portion that does not overlap with the display target data of the effect character CH15. It is set in the open state. In each unit area of the effect and symbol buffer, a completely transparent α value is set in the unit area in which neither the display target data of the effect character CH15 nor the display target data of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is written. It will be in a state of being.

By executing the drawing data creation process, the drawing data stored in the first to fourth storage buffers BF2 to BF5 are combined as shown in FIGS. As shown in 80(e), the variable display effect image is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 80(b) to 80(d), display target data for displaying each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is created from the object data in which the opaque α value is set, and the display thereof is displayed. The translucent α value is set for the target data to superimpose the effect character CH15 on the display target data. As a result, it is possible to display the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 in a semi-transparent state while preventing the occurrence of an event in which an image on the back side of the object data, which should not be originally displayed, is seen as it is. Becomes

By using the drawing buffer BF1 also as a buffer for individually creating drawing data of the effect character CH15 and each of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18, it is necessary to change the drawing buffer BF1 of the creation destination when creating the drawing data. Therefore, the processing design can be facilitated.

Before the drawing data of the effect character CH15 and each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is created in the drawing buffer BF1, the α value of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is set to “0” corresponding to complete transparency. Therefore, in the drawing data after being created in the drawing buffer BF1, the unit area other than the unit area for displaying the effect character CH15 and each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 does not require the post-processing and the α value. Can be set to "0" which corresponds to perfect transparency.

<Another form of configuration relating to variable display production>
The display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 for the drawing buffer BF1 is individually created, and the display target data corresponding to each is stored in different storage buffers BF3 to BF5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 may be collectively created in the drawing buffer BF1, and the collectively created display target data may be stored in one storage buffer. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of times that the initialization processing of the drawing buffer, the creation processing of the display target data, and the storage processing of the display target data are executed, and the processing load can be reduced.

-It is not limited to the configuration in which the same semi-transparent value data is set for the drawing data separately stored in each of the second storage buffer BF3, the third storage buffer BF4, and the fourth storage buffer BF5. The semi-transparent value data to be set may be different for each drawing data.

<Structure for distorted background display>
Next, a configuration for performing the distorted background display will be described. 81A and 81B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the distorted background display. 82(a) to 82(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining image data for performing the distorted background display.

As shown in FIG. 81(a-2), the distorted background display is a background image BGG displayed so that the player recognizes that no distortion has occurred as shown in FIG. 81(a-1). It is to be displayed so that the player recognizes that the distortion has occurred. In this case, the distorted background display is performed so that the player recognizes that the two axes (specifically, the X axis and the Y axis) of the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis are distorted.

As the background image BGG, the background plate-shaped object data GSD and the background texture data GTD1 stored in advance in the memory module 133 are used as shown in FIG. The background plate-shaped object data GSD is object data that is configured in a flat plane shape without a wall thickness and has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface than a normal object having a wall thickness for displaying a character such as a person. .. Then, the background texture data GTD1 is applied to the background plate-shaped object data GSD set in the world coordinate system to create background drawing data, whereby the background image BGG can be displayed. Become.

The distorted background display is not performed by distorting the background plate-shaped object data GSD in the world coordinate system as shown in FIG. 81(a-2), but by adjusting the data of the background texture data GTD1. Done. Specifically, assuming that the background texture data GTD1 is set as the color information as shown in FIG. 81(b-1), as shown in FIG. 81(b-2), a predetermined column By adjusting the color information so that the horizontal width of the color information becomes wider, the background image BGG is displayed so that the gaming ball recognizes that the distortion is generated as shown in FIG. 81(a-2). As described above, the distorted background display is performed by adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 that is two-dimensional data instead of distorting the three-dimensional background plate-shaped object data GSD. The data to be adjusted when the distorted background display is performed can be limited to two-dimensional data, and the processing load can be reduced.

The adjustment mode of the color information of the background texture data GTD1 for displaying the distorted background is set to the texture data provided separately from the background texture data GTD1. As the texture data, as shown in FIG. 82A, the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

The number of pixels of the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 is the same as the number of pixels of the background texture data GTD1. There is a one-to-one correspondence with each pixel of GTD1. As shown in FIG. 82(b), a 1-byte area corresponding to each of the RGB colors is set in each pixel of the background texture data GTD1, and the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 are also shown in FIG. As shown in 82(c), a 1-byte area corresponding to each of the RGB colors on a one-to-one basis is set. That is, although the contents set in each pixel are different for each texture data GTD1 to GTD3, the basic data structure is the same for the background texture data GTD1 and the refraction texture data GTD2, GTD3. There is.

The data (hereinafter, also referred to as R value, G value, B value) corresponding to each RGB color set in each pixel of each refraction texture data GTD2, GTD3 is not used as color information but is distorted. It is used as information on the degree. Specifically, the R value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the X axis, the G value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Y axis, and the B value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Z axis. .. However, the distortion of the background image BGG is not generated for all the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis, but is generated only for the two axes of the X-axis and the Y-axis as already described. Therefore, in each pixel of each of the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, the R value and the G value have distortion data set, but the B value has a constant data set so that all bits are “0”. Has been done.

The first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 are set with the R value and the G value of each pixel such that the adjustment mode of the color information of the background texture data GTD1 is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(a-2), the first refraction texture data GTD2 indicates that in the background image BGG, the center side in the lateral direction is recessed rearward and both left and right sides thereof are bulged forward. While the adjustment mode of the color information is set so that the second refraction texture data GTD3 is swelled forward in the center of the background image BGG in the horizontal direction, and the left and right sides thereof are rearward. The adjustment mode of the color information is set so that the player recognizes that it is recessed. With this configuration, the background image BGG is constant by alternately switching the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 as the refraction texture data to be applied to the background texture data GTD1. It is possible to display such that the player recognizes that the pattern is wavy back and forth.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for performing the distorted background display will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for displaying the distorted background, which is executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation processing for distorted background display is executed by the calculation processing for background in step S2206 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The calculation processing for the distorted background display is started when information about the distorted background display is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is the start timing of the distorted background display (step S3901: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the distorted background display is grasped (step S3902). The image data includes background plate-shaped object data GSD, background texture data GTD1, first refraction texture data GTD2, and second refraction texture data GTD3. Then, in step S3903, the distortion background display start designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the distortion background display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901 or the process of step S3903 is executed, the background plate-shaped object is used as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table in steps S3904 and S3905. The data GSD and the background texture data GTD1 are grasped. Then, with respect to the background plate-shaped object data GSD and the background texture data GTD1, the parameter information is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the image data GSD and GTD1. (Step S3906). In this case, the shape data of the background plate object data GSD in the world coordinate system (that is, the relative position of each pixel) is constant during the period in which the distorted background display is performed.

Then, in step S3907, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first distortion display period based on the currently set execution target table. The first distortion display period is a period in which the first refraction texture data GTD2 is used as the refraction texture data, and the second distortion display period is a period in which the second refraction texture data GTD3 is used as the refraction texture data. If it is the first distortion display period (step S3907: YES), the first refraction texture data GTD2 is grasped in step S3908, and if it is the second distortion display period (step S3907: NO), step S3909 is executed. 2 Grasp the texture data GTD3 for refraction. When the process of step S3908 or step S3909 is executed, in step S3910, distortion background display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the distortion background display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When the calculation processing for displaying the distorted background is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes the plate-shaped object data for background GSD and the texture data for background. The use instruction information of the GTD1 is set, and the use instruction information of the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 on the side to be used this time is set. Further, parameter information applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. Further, distortion background display designation information is set in the drawing list, and distortion background display start designation information is set at the timing of starting the distortion background display.

Next, the distortion background display setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The distorted background display setting process is executed as a part of the background setting process executed in step S2302 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the distortion background display designation information is set in the drawing list, the distortion background display setting process is executed.

When the distortion background display start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S4001: YES), the memory module 133 is the display target of this time based on the information of the address set in the drawing list. The addresses of the areas in which various image data are stored are grasped, and various image data are read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the grasped result (step S4002). The image data includes background plate-shaped object data GSD, background texture data GTD1, first refraction texture data GTD2, and second refraction texture data GTD3.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001 or if the process of step S4002 is executed, in step S4003 and step S4004, the background plate-shaped object data GTD1 and the background texture data GTD1 are displayed based on the current drawing list. As the data of. In step S4005, the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 corresponding to the current distortion display period are grasped as display target data based on the current drawing list. After that, in step S4006, the parameter information of the various image data is grasped.

In a succeeding step S4007, a refraction applying process for applying the refraction texture data GTD2, GTD3, which is the current use target, to the background texture data GTD1 is executed.

In the refraction applying process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 85, first, the background texture data GTD1 is separately stored in the background separate storage area 141a provided in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S4101). As a result, in the situation where the background texture data GTD1 has already been read into the expansion buffer GTD1, the same data as the background texture data GTD1 is stored and held in the background separate storage area 141a. In the following description, the background texture data GTD1 read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 is referred to as the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn, and the background written in the background separate storage area 141a. The texture data GTD1 for background is referred to as background texture data GTD1 to be separately stored. After that, in step S4102, the same number as the total number of pixels of the background texture data GTD1 is set in the applicable counter provided in the register 153 of the VDP 135.

In the following step S4103, the R value and the G value are extracted from one pixel corresponding to the current applicable counter in the refraction texture data GTD2, GTD3 that is the current target of use. Then, in step S4104, a refraction calculation process using the extracted R value and G value is executed.

In the refraction calculation process, when the pixel corresponding to the current value of the application counter in the background texture data GTD1 is used as the reference pixel, how many consecutive pixels from the reference pixel are to be subjected to the blending process is determined. R data extracted in step S4103 are data to be attached and data for determining what weight to perform the blending process in relation to the distance from the reference pixel for each pixel for which the blending process is performed. It is calculated from a predetermined arithmetic expression using the value and the G value. In this case, the pixels to be subjected to the blending process are limited to the pixels lined up on one axis (specifically, the X axis in FIG. 81A) with respect to the reference pixel, and the other pixels on one axis (specifically Does not include pixels lined up in the Z-axis in FIG. 81(a). The refraction calculation process is performed by the refraction calculation unit 154 provided as a dedicated circuit in the VDP 135. Further, as described above, the R value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the X axis, and the G value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Y axis. Each of the R value and the G value is 1-byte data. Since it is a quantity, it can take a value of 0 to 255. The refraction calculation unit 154 derives target pixel data for specifying a pixel to be included in the blending process based on the G value corresponding to the degree of distortion information on the Y axis, and the degree of distortion information on the X axis. Based on the R value corresponding to, the weighting data for specifying the weighting of the blending process in relation to the distance from the reference pixel is derived.

After executing the refraction calculation process in step S4104, in step S4105, the color information of the pixel corresponding to the calculation result of the refraction calculation process in step S4104 is stored separately by using the target pixel data. It is extracted from the background texture data GTD1. Then, each blend value corresponding to the weighting data is integrated with respect to the color information of each pixel, and the sum of each value after integration is calculated (step S4106). In this case, the blending process is individually performed for each RGB color of each pixel. After that, each value of RGB calculated in step S4106 is overwritten on the pixel corresponding to the current value of the applicable counter in the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn. As a result, the adjustment processing of the color information corresponding to the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to be used is executed for the pixel of the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn corresponding to the current value of the applicable counter.

Then, in step S4108, the value of the application counter of the register 153 is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the value of the application counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S4109). When the value of the application counter is 1 or more (step S4109: NO), the processes of steps S4103 to S4107 are executed for the pixel corresponding to the updated value of the application counter.

Returning to the description of the setting process for the distorted background display, after performing the refraction applying process in step S4007, in step S4008, the setting process to the world coordinate system is performed according to the contents corresponding to the process results of step S4003 to step S4007. To execute.

By performing the setting process for the distorted background display as described above, the background plate-shaped object data GSD is arranged in the world coordinate system, and various parameter information derived by calculation in the display CPU 131 is used for the background. It is applied to the plate object data GSD. Further, the background texture data GTD1 after the color information adjustment processing is executed using the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 that are the objects of use this time is applied to the background plate-shaped object data GSD. .. Thereby, on the display surface P, the background image BGG is displayed so that the player recognizes that the X axis and the Y axis are distorted.

Since the data for applying the refraction is provided as the texture data as described above, it is possible to generate the refraction effect for the image by using the data structure of the texture data as it is. In this case, it is not necessary to store the data having the dedicated data structure for causing refraction in the memory module 133, and the data for applying refraction is handled in the same manner as when reading other texture data. It becomes possible to read from the memory module 133. For example, in the case of a dedicated data structure for causing refraction, the processing content for expanding the data in the expansion buffer 141 is different from the texture data, but for applying the refraction. Since the data is provided as the texture data, it is possible to make the processing content for the development the same as in the case of the normal texture data. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

In the structure in which the data corresponding to each color of RGB is set in the texture data, the refraction calculation unit 154 does not use all the data but uses only the R value and the G value as a part of the background. The adjustment processing of the color information of the texture data GTD1 is executed. As a result, the processing can be simplified as compared with the configuration using each RGB data, and the time required for the adjustment processing of the color information of the background texture data GTD1 can be shortened.

By distorting the background plate-shaped object data GSD that is three-dimensional data and adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 that is two-dimensional data to display the distorted background, The data to be adjusted when the background is displayed can be limited to two-dimensional data, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Another form of configuration related to distorted background display>
In place of the configuration for adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 by using the refraction texture data GTD2, GTD3, each pixel of the background plate-like object data GSD is utilized by using the refraction texture data GTD2, GTD3. The configuration may be such that the background plate-shaped object data GSD is distorted by adjusting the coordinate data, and as a result, the distorted background display is performed.

A period in which the background texture data GTD1 is directly drawn without applying the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, instead of the configuration in which the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 are always applied to the background texture data GTD1. May be set before or after the distorted background display period. In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the background image BGG is distorted.

Using one value or all values instead of the configuration for deriving the parameter information for refracting the image by using two values among the R value, G value and B value of the texture data The parameter information may be derived.

-Instead of deriving the parameter information for refracting the image using the texture data, other parameter information such as the transparency value of the image may be derived using the texture data.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configuration of the following another mode may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) When the sound-light side MPU 62 instructs the display CPU 72 to execute the effect, the second stage effect contents are instructed by a command including the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3. However, the configuration may be such that the presence or absence of execution of the second stage production is instructed, and there are cases in which the content of production is instructed and the case where the execution presence or absence of second stage production is instructed. Good.

(2) One command composed of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is transmitted in association with each of a plurality of types of second stage contents included in one effect. Instead of the configuration, one command including command data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of second stage contents included in one effect may be transmitted. Specifically, a command including one command data corresponding to the effect contents of the first stage and each command data corresponding to each of the contents of the second stage may be transmitted. Even in this case, it is preferable that the contents of the respective second stages are distinguished in byte units.

(3) One command including the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is transmitted in association with each of a plurality of types of second stage contents included in one effect. In the configuration, when the first command data CD1 of each command transmitted by the time the end command is transmitted does not match, the display CPU 72 requests the sound-light side MPU 62 to retransmit the command, and there is the request again. In this case, the same command may be transmitted again from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. As a result, even if the command is rewritten due to electrical noise, the command and the notification can be retransmitted, so that the effect and the notification can be accurately executed.

(4) One command including the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is transmitted in association with each of a plurality of types of second-stage contents included in one effect. In the configuration, the start command may be transmitted before a plurality of types of commands corresponding to one effect are transmitted. As a result, it becomes possible for the display CPU 72 to clearly understand whether or not a command corresponding to one effect is being transmitted.

(5) Even if the background calculation process of step S906, the effect calculation process of step S909 and the symbol calculation process of step S912 included in the task process (FIG. 19) are being executed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a new processing cycle can be started. In this case, the task processing may be restarted from the middle of the interrupted operation processing in the next processing time of the V interrupt processing, or the task processing may be restarted from the beginning of the interrupted operation processing. With this configuration, it is possible to start a new processing time of the V interrupt processing at an early stage.

(6) When the notification execution target table is read as the execution target by the display CPU 72, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is started during the execution of the task processing (FIG. 19). Even if it does, the task processing may be executed by using the information corresponding to the new pointer information in the execution target table instead of restarting the processing from the middle of the interruption in the next execution of the task processing. This makes it possible to give priority to the progress of the content of the notification.

(7) When a new processing time of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is started during the execution of the task processing (FIG. 19) and the processing is restarted from the midway of the interruption at the next execution time of the task processing Although the display CPU 72 transmits the delay command to the sound-light side MPU 62 to adjust the pointer information of the control pattern table in the sound-light side MPU 62, the adjustment may not be performed.

(8) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data set in the world coordinate system, but instead of this, all the cameras set in the world coordinate system are set. A single camera may be commonly set for image data.

(9) In the second embodiment described above, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is configured to be projected in units of the background image, the effect image, and the pattern image, but is summarized in the unit of the background image and the effect image. The effect image and the pattern image may be collectively projected, or all of them may be collectively projected.

(10) In the second embodiment, when the color information setting process (step S2309) is performed, the color information may be set such that the texture is attached only to the projected surface. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, color information such as texture mapping may be set after projection. In this case, at the time of projection, the coordinate information of each pixel forming the projection plane may be stored, and the color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

(11) Display control based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50. The device 90 may control the audio emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 50, and both functions of the both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 50. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(12) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a big hit is generated, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and sparrow balls.

Also, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, provided with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, the game machine main body that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage unit and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the reel starts to rotate.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P),
A display control unit (VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using the generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152);
Equipped with
The data generation unit includes an information derivation unit (a function of executing steps S2807 to S2815 in the display CPU 131) that derives control information (coordinate data) used to generate the generated data,
The information deriving means,
Pre-derivation setting means for setting the derivation storage means (coordinate calculation area 169) to the pre-derivation state (a function of the display CPU 131 for executing the processing of steps S2808 and S2809);
Derivation executing means (function of executing the process of step S2810 in the display CPU 131) for deriving the control information using the derivation storage means set to the pre-derivation state,
The setting to the pre-derivation state by the pre-derivation setting means is a configuration that can be executed a plurality of times to generate the generated data at the update timing of one image,
The derivation executing means is configured to set the pre-derivation state by the pre-derivation setting means and before the pre-derivation state is newly set. To CHG5), a plurality of correspondence derivation means for deriving the control information (a function of executing the process of step S2810 of the display CPU 131 when deriving the coordinate data of the skeleton data for collection FRD2) are provided. And the gaming machine.

According to the characteristic A1, by generating the generated data for image display using the control information, it is possible to change the content of the generated data by changing the control information and diversify the display mode of the image. It becomes possible to do. Further, when the control information is derived, the derivation storage unit is used, and the derivation of the control information is started after the derivation storage unit is set to the pre-derivation state. It will be possible.

In this case, the control information corresponding to the plurality of types of individual images is derived after the pre-derivation state is set in the derivation storage means and before the new pre-derivation state is newly set. To be done. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the control information, as compared with the configuration in which the pre-derivation state is set for each individual image. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature A2. The pre-derivation setting unit sets the pre-derivation information about the individual image that is the derivation target of the control information after initializing the derivation storage unit in the derivation storage unit after the initialization. The game machine according to feature A1, wherein the storage means is set to the pre-derivation state.

According to the characteristic A2, when the control information is derived, it is possible to appropriately derive the control information by initializing the derivation storage means and setting the pre-derivation information. In this case, since the control information is derived for a plurality of types of individual images after the pre-derivation state is set and before the pre-derivation state is newly set, the derivation storage means. It is possible to reduce the number of times of initialization and setting of the pre-derivation information, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the control information.

Features A3. The data generation means uses one image data (skeleton data for collection FRD2) to display the plurality of types of individual images for which the control information is collectively derived by the plural correspondence derivation means. The gaming machine described in the feature A1 or A2.

According to the characteristic A3, since the plurality of types of individual images are displayed by one image data, the control information collectively derived can be applied to the one image data instead of being applied to the plurality of image data. Good. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process for specifying the image data to which the control information is applied.

Features A4. The data generating means, when generating generated data for displaying an image in which an individual image operates, reference data (skeleton data FRD1 that is data set corresponding to the individual image and serves as a reference of movement. , Skeleton data for aggregation FRD2), deformation data (skin data SKD1, skin data for aggregation SKD2) deformed according to the reference data, and color data (texture data BTD1) for which color information to be applied to the deformation data is determined. , The texture data for aggregation BTD2) can be used,
Each of the plurality of types of individual images for which the control information is collectively derived by the plural correspondence derivation unit is an image that can be displayed by using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data. Yes,
Any one of features A1 to A3 characterized in that the control information changes the content of the reference data corresponding to the plurality of types of individual images so that the operation mode of the plurality of types of individual images changes. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic A4, since the moving images of the plurality of types of individual images are displayed using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, it is possible to realistically represent the moving images of the plurality of types of individual images. Becomes In this case, since the control information for changing the content of the reference data is derived collectively for a plurality of types of individual images, even if the configuration uses the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, the processing load is extremely high. It becomes possible to prevent it from becoming too high.

Features A5. The data generating means is configured to use the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data when generating generated data for displaying an image in which a specific individual image (bone display character CH10) moves. ,
In the characteristic A4, the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images is equal to or less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual images. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic A5, even when a plurality of types of individual images are simultaneously displayed using the reference data, the deformation data and the color data, the total data of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images Since the capacity is less than or equal to the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying a specific individual image, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that is targeted for the derivation of control information and the application of the derived control information. It is possible to reduce the load.

Features A6. The reference data has a plurality of unit reference data (bone data BOD1 to BOD50, ABD1 to ABD50), and an individual corresponding to the reference data by changing the relative positional relationship of the plurality of unit reference data. It is a configuration in which the operation mode of the image is changed,
The plurality of unit reference data, the data relationship is set so that when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed following it.
The unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in the relation of the sub unit reference data with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. A game machine described in A5.

According to the characteristic A6, since the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the operation mode of one individual image is determined by one reference data. In, it is possible to more realistically represent the operation mode of the individual image. In this case, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in the sub unit reference data relationship with the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. With this, when the main individual image and the sub individual image are moved together, the position data about the main unit reference data is used by using the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data in the reference data. It suffices to adjust the control information to change the.

Features A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the position data of the sub unit reference data can be changed without affecting the position data of the main unit reference data.

According to the characteristic A7, even if the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data is set between the main individual image and the sub individual image, the sub individual image is irrelevant regardless of the main individual image. It becomes possible to operate.

Feature A8. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image and the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image, and the unit reference data of the main individual image is the main between the corresponding unit reference data. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, wherein the data relationship is set such that the unit reference data becomes the unit reference data and the unit reference data of the sub individual image becomes the sub unit reference data.

According to the feature A8, the main individual image and the sub individual image can be associated in detail in units of unit reference data.

Feature A9. The main individual image and the sub individual image have the same or substantially the same number and arrangement of unit reference data,
At least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8.

According to the feature A9, at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image, so that it is possible to suppress the data capacity required to store various data.

For any one of the features A1 to A9, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P),
A display control unit (VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using the generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152);
Equipped with
When the data generation unit generates generated data for displaying an image in which an individual image operates, the data is set in correspondence with the individual image and serves as reference data for movement (aggregate skeleton). It is possible to use the data FRD2), the deformation data that deforms according to the reference data (skin data for collection SKD2), and the color data (the texture data for collection BTD2) that defines the color information to be applied to the deformation data. Possible configurations,
The reference data includes a plurality of unit reference data (bone data ABD1 to ABD50), and the relative positional relationship of the plurality of unit reference data is changed to operate an individual image corresponding to the reference data. Is the configuration to be changed,
The plurality of unit reference data, the data relationship is set so that when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed following it.
The unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual images (second to fifth group unit characters CHG2 to CHG5) among the plurality of types of individual images are compared with the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image (first group unit character CHG1). A gaming machine characterized by being set in a relationship of the sub unit reference data.

According to the feature B1, since the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the operation mode of one individual image is determined by one reference data. In, it is possible to more realistically represent the operation mode of the individual image. In this case, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in the sub unit reference data relationship with the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. With this, when the main individual image and the sub individual image are moved together, the position data about the main unit reference data is used by using the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data in the reference data. It suffices to adjust the control information to change the.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the position data of the sub unit reference data can be changed without affecting the position data of the main unit reference data.

According to the characteristic B2, even if the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data is set between the main individual image and the sub individual image, the sub individual image is irrelevant regardless of the main individual image. It becomes possible to operate.

Feature B3. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image and the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image, and the unit reference data of the main individual image is the main between the corresponding unit reference data. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the data relationship is set such that the unit reference data becomes the unit reference data of the sub individual image and becomes the sub unit reference data.

According to the feature B3, the main individual image and the sub individual image can be associated in detail in units of unit reference data.

Feature B4. The main individual image and the sub individual image have the same or substantially the same number and arrangement of unit reference data,
At least one of the transformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

According to the feature B4, at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image, so that it is possible to suppress the data capacity required to store various data.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the unit reference data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of individual images is included in one reference data.

According to the feature B5, since the unit reference data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of individual images are aggregated into one reference data, the processing load is reduced in the processing for reading the reference data and the processing using the reference data. It becomes possible to do.

Feature B6. The data generating means is configured to use the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data when generating generated data for displaying an image in which a specific individual image (bone display character CH10) moves. ,
Features B1 to B1, wherein the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images is equal to or less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual images. The gaming machine according to any one of B5.

According to the feature B6, even when a plurality of types of individual images are simultaneously displayed using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, the total data of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images Since the capacity is less than or equal to the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual image, the amount of data targeted for derivation of information for controlling the reference data and application of the derived information is suppressed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

For any one of the features B1 to B6, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Arrangement means for arranging object data, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP135) and viewpoint setting means (VDP135) for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. In step S2306) and projecting the object data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating generation data (drawing data) based on the data projected on the projection plane. Generation data for storing the generation data generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting unit (function of executing the processing of step S2310 to step S2312 in the VDP 135). Storage means (frame buffer 142),
Display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display means (symbol display device 41),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The arranging means uses the corresponding image (shadow image CH12, CH14) which is one of the shadow image and the reflection image of the first individual image (effect characters CH11, CH13) as the second individual image (ground image BG, stair image). SG), the corresponding object data (planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD, step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD) that is object data for displaying the corresponding image. Are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space separately from the object data for displaying the second individual image (ground object data BGD, stair object data SGD).

According to the characteristic C1, since the corresponding object data, which is the object data for displaying the corresponding image, is set separately from the object data for displaying the second individual image, the second individual image is displayed. It is possible to perform the data setting for displaying the corresponding image independently of the data setting of. As a result, even when the corresponding image, which is one of the shadow image and the reflection image of the first individual image, is displayed so as to overlap the part of the second individual image, Irrespective of the above, it is possible to set data for displaying the second individual image, which facilitates the design for displaying these images. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the corresponding object data is a plate-shaped polygon.

According to the characteristic C2, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while suppressing an increase in the data capacity required to store the object data.

Feature C3. The arrangement means arranges the corresponding object data so as to be spaced apart from the object data for displaying the second individual image on the side where the display position is on the front side. Game machine.

According to the characteristic C3, the corresponding object data is not arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space over the object data for displaying the second individual image, but is arranged so as to be spaced apart on the side where the display position is on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to superimpose and display the corresponding image on the second individual image while using the configuration of determining the image to be displayed in relation to the arrangement position in the virtual three-dimensional space.

Feature C4. The data generating means, when changing the position of the object data for displaying the first individual image in the virtual three-dimensional space, means for changing the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space in accordance with the change. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, which is provided with (a function of the display CPU 131 to execute the processes of steps S3112 and S3313).

According to the characteristic C4, by changing the display position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space, the corresponding image can be moved and displayed following the moving display of the first individual image.

Feature C5. The data generation unit includes a texture setting unit (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the VDP 135) that sets texture data for the object data,
When the display mode of the first individual image is the first display mode, the texture setting means sets the first corresponding texture data (the first planar shadow texture data BST1) as the texture data for displaying the corresponding image. When the corresponding individual object data is set and the display mode of the second individual image is the second display mode, the second corresponding texture data (the second planar shadow texture data BST2 is used as texture data for displaying the corresponding image). ) Is set in the corresponding object data, the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

According to the characteristic C5, it is possible to match the display mode of the corresponding image with the display mode of the first individual image simply by switching the texture data set in the corresponding object data.

Feature C6. When the display mode of the first individual image is the first display mode, the data generation unit uses the first shape data as the shape data that determines the shape of the corresponding object data, and displays the first individual image. When the mode is the second display mode, it is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3309 to S3311 in the display CPU 131) that uses the second shape data as the shape data that determines the shape of the corresponding object data. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5.

According to the characteristic C6, by changing the shape data used for the corresponding object data, it becomes possible to match the display mode of the corresponding image with the display mode of the first individual image.

Feature C7. The data generation unit includes a texture setting unit (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the VDP 135) that sets texture data for the object data,
The texture setting means, when the display position of the first individual image is changed, the correspondence of the texture data for displaying the corresponding image in a situation where the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is not changed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, which is provided with setting position changing means (a function of executing the process of step S3410 in the display CPU 131) that changes a setting position relationship with respect to object data.

According to the characteristic C7, the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed by changing the set positional relationship of the texture data with respect to the corresponding object data to cause the corresponding image to follow the moving display of the first individual image. Even in a situation where this is not preferable, the corresponding image can be moved and displayed.

Feature C8. The shape data of the corresponding object data is set in correspondence with the shape data of the object data for displaying the second individual image corresponding to the area in which the corresponding image is displayed in the second individual image in an overlapping manner. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7 characterized by being present.

According to the characteristic C8, since the corresponding object data is set corresponding to the shape of the object data for displaying the second individual image, even if the corresponding image is displayed using the corresponding object data. It is possible to suitably superimpose the corresponding image on the second individual image.

Further, by applying the configuration limited to the above-mentioned feature C7 in the configuration of the feature C8, the moving display of the corresponding image is performed by changing the set positional relationship of the texture data with respect to the corresponding object data, and the second individual image It is possible to move and display the corresponding image without complicatedly moving the corresponding object data set corresponding to the shape of the object data for displaying in the virtual three-dimensional space.

For any one of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display section using image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data (base moving image data BMD) used for reproducing a moving image,
The display control means,
Expanding means for expanding the moving image data in the expanding area (expanding buffer 81) and creating still image data for a plurality of update timings for the image corresponding to the moving image data (the process of step S1303 in the VDP 76). Function to execute, video decoder 93),
By using the still image data for a plurality of update timings developed by the developing means in the order defined in the moving image data, the moving image corresponding image (color change effect character CH1) corresponding to the moving image data is used. ) Is displayed as moving image display execution means (a function of the display CPU 72 to execute the process of step S1206, a function of the VDP 76 to execute the process of step S1306),
Corresponding to the additional image data by reading the additional image data (first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3) from the display storage unit and using the additional image data when using the still image data. An additional execution unit (a function of the display CPU 72 that executes the process of step S1206, a function of the VDP 76 that executes the process of step S1307) for adding an additional individual image (color change target region CR) to the moving image corresponding image;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, when displaying an image at one update timing, not only the still image data obtained by expanding the moving image data is used, but also the additional image data is used, thereby supporting the moving image. The configuration is such that an additional individual image is additionally displayed with respect to the image. As a result, even if it is necessary to change a part of the moving image compatible image, the moving image data can be used as it is by using the additional image data to handle the partial change. It will be possible. In addition, for example, even when a plurality of types of moving images in which some of the contents of the moving image-compatible image are different are required, the moving image data can be changed by using the additional image data to make some of the contents different. There is no need to prepare multiple types. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the additional image data that is different at a plurality of update timings can be used so that the additional individual image can be changed at a plurality of update timings.

According to the feature D2, the content of the additional individual image can be changed in accordance with the content of the moving image-compatible image because the different additional image data can be used at a plurality of update timings.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the additional image data corresponding to each of the plurality of update timing still image data can be used.

According to the feature D3, it is possible to display the additional individual image corresponding to the content of the moving image corresponding image over the entire display period of the moving image corresponding image.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in the feature D2 or D3, wherein the additional image data for a plurality of update timings is stored in the display storage unit in advance without being compressed as moving image data.

According to the characteristic D4, since the additional image data is stored as the moving image data without being compressed, when the additional individual image is additionally displayed on the moving image compatible image, the expansion processing of plural types of moving image data is performed at the same time. There is no need to do it.

Feature D5. The game machine according to Feature D4, wherein the additional image data is set to a transparent value data corresponding to translucency or transparency.

According to the feature D5, since the data of the transparent value corresponding to the semitransparent or transparent is set in the additional image data, it is possible to perform the display using the transparent value in the additional display of the additional individual image. For example, an effect image can be displayed as an additional individual image, and in addition to that, an image in which a predetermined portion is transparent or semitransparent can be displayed as an additional individual image. In addition, the image quality of the additional individual image can be improved by storing the additional image data in which the transparent value data corresponding to the semitransparent or the transparent is set without being compressed as the moving image data, which has the configuration of the characteristic D4. It is possible to prevent deterioration.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the additional individual image corresponds to a part of an image portion of the moving image corresponding image.

According to the feature D6, it is possible to change the content of a part of the image portion of the moving image corresponding image by using the additional individual image.

Feature D7. The display control unit changes the color information applied to the additional image data (a function for executing the process of step S1204 in the display CPU 72, a process of step S1305 and steps S1403 to S1406 in the VDP 76). (A function) The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6.

According to the characteristic D7, since the color information applied to the additional image data is changed, the image data is stored as compared with the configuration in which the additional image data is provided in correspondence with each of the plurality of types of color information. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for.

For any one of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
By setting the image data in a setting storage unit (frame buffer 82) having a plurality of unit setting areas (unit areas 121), drawing data is created in the setting storage unit, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is set. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display portion based on the output to the display means,
Equipped with
The display control means,
When a plurality of individual images (effect effect character CH2, effect image EG2) are displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display unit, the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display unit. Regarding the data in the setting area, the back side image data, which is the image data of the overlapping position of the back side individual image (effect effect character CH2), is the front side image, which is the image data of the overlapping position of the front side individual image (effect image EG2). Duplication reflecting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1701, S1709, and S1710 in the VDP 76) for bringing the data into a reflected state,
A reflection reducing unit (in the VDP 76) that reduces the reflection ratio of at least one of the front image data and the back image data when the back image data is reflected on the front image data by the overlap reflection unit. A function of executing the processing of steps S1705 to S1708),
Equipped with
When reducing the reflection ratio of one of the reduction target image data of the front side image data and the back side image data, the reflection reduction unit reduces one of the front side image data and the back side image data. A game machine characterized in that a reduction amount of the reflection ratio is changed according to the content of the reference image data.

According to the characteristic E1, the front side image data and the back side image data are overlapped and reflected in a state where the ratio of reflecting the reduction target image data is reduced. Thereby, for example, when the front side image data and the back side image data are reflected as they are, the display ratio of at least one of the image data is reduced in a case where the image cannot be displayed well. It is possible to display well.

In this case, the reduction amount of the reflection rate of the reduction target image data is changed according to the content of the reduction amount reference image data. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the reduction target image data in a mode according to the content of the reduction amount reference image data, as compared with the configuration in which the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is uniformly reduced, and the overlapping reflection of the image data is prevented. When it is performed, it is possible to make fine adjustments to further enhance the display effect.

As described above, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

In addition, specifically, as a configuration of the duplication reflection unit, “the image data includes a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information, Is a calculation processing execution means for executing a predetermined calculation processing by using numerical information of each unit image data which overlaps each other in the plurality of individual images, and data of a calculation result of the calculation processing, And a setting process executing means for setting a unit setting area corresponding to each of the unit image data overlapping each other". As a more specific configuration, "each unit setting area is The numerical value can be set within a range up to the limit numerical value, and the display control means displays a brighter color in the dot corresponding to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical value information. As described above, the arithmetic processing execution means is, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, an addition processing for adding numerical information of unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images. Is executed”.

Feature E2. The image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information,
The unit setting area has a configuration capable of setting numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value,
The display control means is configured to output the image signal such that the larger the numerical value is set as the numerical value information, the brighter the color is displayed in the dots of the display unit corresponding to the unit setting area,
The reflection reduction unit reduces the numerical value information of the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the reduction amount reference image data of which the numerical value information is relatively large. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the reduction amount of the reflection rate is larger than the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the amount reference image data.

According to the characteristic E2, since the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which numerical information of large numerical value is set is displayed in a brighter color, complication of display control of the dot can be suppressed. In this case, the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the reduction amount reference image data whose numerical information is relatively large is smaller than the unit image of the reduction amount reference image data whose numerical information is relatively small. The reduction amount of the reflection rate is larger than the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the data. As a result, the amount of reduction of the reflection ratio is increased by giving priority to not reaching the limit value for the part that may reach the limit value of the unit setting area when the image data of each individual image is reflected in duplicate. With respect to a portion where the limit value may not be reached, it is possible to reduce the reflection rate reduction amount by giving priority to overlapping reflection of the contents of the image data of each individual image.

Feature E3. The image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information,
The reflection reducing unit reduces the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data by a reduction amount of the reflection ratio corresponding to each of the numerical information of the unit image data included in the reduction amount reference image data. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2.

According to the feature E3, since it is possible to adjust the reduction amount of the reflection ratio in units of unit image data, it is possible to finely adjust the place where the reduction of the reflection ratio is given priority and the place where the duplicate reflection is given priority. It will be possible.

Feature E4. The unit setting area has a configuration capable of setting numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value,
The image data has a plurality of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information within the range up to the limit numerical value,
The reflection reducing unit sets a value of a result obtained by dividing a value obtained by subtracting color information of the unit image data included in the reduction amount reference image data from the limit numerical value by the limit numerical value by the unit image data. The united image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit setting area is reduced to reduce the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data. Game machine.

According to the feature E4, it is possible to reduce the reflection ratio according to the content of the reduction amount reference image data by using each image data itself that is the object of duplicate reflection. Therefore, while suppressing the data capacity for storing various data in advance, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature E5. The reduction target image data whose reflection ratio is reduced using the reduction amount reference image data is image data on a side different from the reduction target image data of the front side image data and the back side image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, which is characterized by being present.

According to the feature E5, it is possible to reduce the reflection ratio of the image data according to the content of the image data of the other side of the duplicate reflection.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the reduction amount reference image data is the front side image data and the reduction target image data is the back side image data.

According to the feature E6, the back side image data can be reflected in a manner according to the content of the front side individual image, as compared with the configuration in which the reflection rate of the back side image data is uniformly reduced, and the image data is duplicated. It is possible to make fine adjustments to further enhance the display effect when reflecting.

For any one of the features E1 to E6, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Arrangement means for arranging object data, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP135) and viewpoint setting means (VDP135) for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. In step S2306) and projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating generation data (drawing data) based on the projection data projected on the projection plane. Generating means for storing the generated data generated by the data generating means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation part 151, and rendering part 152) having the drawing setting means (function of executing the processing of step S2310 to step S2312 in the VDP 135) Data storage means (frame buffer 142),
Display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display section (display surface P) of the display means (symbol display device 41),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generating means is provided with a transparent value setting means (a function for executing the process of step S3815 in the VDP 135) for setting a transparent value corresponding to the semitransparent to the projection data.

According to the feature F1, since the transparency value corresponding to the semitransparency is set after the projection data is created, the semitransparent image display can be finally performed without making the object data semitransparent. It will be possible. If you create projection data after making the object data semi-transparent, there is a possibility that the image part on the back side that you do not want to display as object data will be displayed, and if you try to create the projection data while avoiding it Processing may be complicated. On the other hand, since the semitransparent image display can be finally performed without making the object data in the semitransparent state, the semitransparent image display can be suitably performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature F2. The data generation means makes the semi-transparent to the object data for displaying the individual image (symbol display portions CH16 to CH18) for which the transparent value corresponding to the semi-transparent is set by the transparent value setting means. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the corresponding transparency value is not set.

According to the feature F2, since the object data is not in a semi-transparent state, it is possible to prevent the back side image portion which should not be originally displayed as the object data from being displayed. Further, since it has the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 and sets the transparency value corresponding to the semitransparent to the projection data, the semitransparent image display is performed while avoiding the above inconvenience. Is possible.

Feature F3. The data generating means,
When displaying a plurality of individual images (effect character CH15, symbol display portions CH16 to CH18), predetermined projection data corresponding to some individual images of the plurality of individual images are created, and separately from the plurality of individual images. Individual creating means (step S3802, step S3803, step S3805, step S3806, step S3808, step S3809, step S3811 in VDP135) for creating the specific projection data corresponding to the individual image not included in the predetermined projection data among the individual images. And a function of executing the processing of step S3812),
Generation executing means (function of executing the process of step S3816 in the VDP 135) for setting the predetermined projection data in a mode according to the transparency value in the storage area in which the specific projection data is set;
The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F3, the projection data is created a plurality of times, and a plurality of individual projection data are simply combined while setting a transparency value corresponding to semi-transparency for some projection data. It is possible to display the images so as to overlap each other in the depth direction of the display unit and to reflect the content of the overlapping position of the back side individual image in the overlapping position of the front side individual image.

Feature F4. The individual creating means,
Data creation means (step S3802, step S3805, step S3808, and step S3811 in VDP135) for sequentially creating each projection data including the predetermined projection data and the specific projection data in the projection data storage means (drawing buffer BF1) Function to execute)
A means for writing the projection data created in the projection data storage means into the storage storage means (first to fourth storage buffers BF2 to BF5) (step S3803, step S3806, step S3809 and step S3812 in the VDP135) is executed. Function),
A gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic F4, in a configuration in which a plurality of pieces of projection data are created and then the pieces of projection data are combined to generate the generated data, the storage means that is the destination for creating the projection data can be integrated in the projection data storage means. Becomes As a result, it is not necessary to change the storage means of the creation destination when creating the projection data, so that the processing design can be facilitated. Further, since the storage means for storing the created projection data in the projection data storage means is provided, it is possible to separately save the created projection data until the synthesis execution.

Feature F5. The individual creating unit creates each projection data including the predetermined projection data and the specific projection data in a projection data storage unit (drawing buffer BF1),
The projection data storage means has a plurality of projection unit storage areas,
Each of these projection unit storage areas has a configuration in which color information and transparent value information can be set,
The individual creating unit creates the predetermined projection data after setting information of the transparency value corresponding to transparency as the transparency value information of each projection unit storage area in the projection data storage unit, and displays the predetermined projection data in the predetermined projection data. In the projection unit storage area in which the data corresponding to the target individual image is written, the transparency value information corresponding to opacity is set as the transparency value information, and in the other projection unit storage areas, the transparency value information is set as the transparency value. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, characterized in that the information of the corresponding transparency value is maintained.

According to the feature F5, since the projection data is created in the projection data storage unit after the information of the transparency value corresponding to the transparency is set in each projection unit area in the projection data storage unit, the projection data In, it is possible to make the information of the transparency value of the portion where the individual image is not rendered transparent without performing post-processing after the projection data is created. As a result, even if the generated data is generated by simply superimposing a plurality of projection data, the data portion of the individual image that is the projection target in each projection data is overwritten by the blank data portion. It is possible to prevent it.

For any one of the features F1 to F5, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display section using image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means stores first predetermined image data (normal effect image data ED5) as image data for displaying a predetermined image (increasing effect image EG6), and more than the first predetermined image data. The second predetermined image data (image data ED6 for simple effect) whose resolution is set low is stored,
Even when using the second predetermined image data, the display control means enlarges the second predetermined image data so that the predetermined image is displayed in a size similar to that when using the first predetermined image data. A game machine provided with an image enlarging means (a function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the VDP 76).

According to the characteristic G1, not only the first predetermined image data but also the second predetermined image data whose resolution is set lower than the first predetermined image data is stored as the image data for displaying the predetermined image. Then, when the second predetermined image data is used, the second predetermined image data is enlarged and used so that the predetermined image is displayed in the same size as when the first predetermined image data is used. Thus, the first predetermined image data is used when the predetermined image is displayed in the high image quality state, and the second predetermined image data is used when the time required to read the image data is shortened even if the image quality is deteriorated. It is possible to use the predetermined image data. Therefore, it is possible to perform data setting for displaying the predetermined image in a mode according to the situation, and it is possible to suitably perform display control.

Features G2. Necessary for enlarging the second predetermined image data in the image enlarging means than a difference between a processing time required for reading the first predetermined image data and a processing time required for reading the second predetermined image data. The gaming machine according to feature G1 characterized in that the processing time is shorter.

According to the feature G2, the processing time when the second predetermined image data is read and used after being enlarged can be shorter than the processing time when the first predetermined image data is read and used. Thus, by intentionally using the second predetermined image data in a situation where the processing load is large, it is possible to display the predetermined image even in a situation where the processing load is large.

Features G3. The image enlarging means stores the enlarged image data after enlarging the second predetermined image data in a predetermined storage means (development buffer 81),
The display control means uses the enlarged image data stored in the predetermined storage means during a period in which the predetermined image is displayed by using the second predetermined image data. A gaming machine described in G2.

According to the characteristic G3, after the second predetermined image data is enlarged, the enlarged image data is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, and therefore, the processing in the case of using the second predetermined image data over a plurality of update timings It is possible to reduce the load.

Features G4. The display control means uses the first predetermined image data from a state in which the image data after the enlargement of the second predetermined image data by the image enlargement means is used as the image data for displaying the predetermined image. Any of the features G1 to G3 characterized in that it is provided with a use target setting means (a function of the display CPU 72 for executing the processing of steps S2015 to S2020, a function of the VDP 76 for executing the processing of step S2111). The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic G4, it is possible to switch from a situation in which the second predetermined image data is used to reduce the processing load to a situation in which the first predetermined image data is used to improve the image quality, while continuing to display the predetermined image. Becomes

Features G5. The use target setting means, when starting display of the predetermined image at a timing when the number of individual images displayed on the display unit increases, as the image data for displaying the predetermined image, the enlarged image data The gaming machine according to feature G4, characterized in that the image data for displaying the predetermined image is switched to the first predetermined image data after that.

According to the feature G5, when the display of a predetermined image is to be started at the timing when the number of individual images increases, the time required to read the image data at that timing may locally increase. By displaying the predetermined image using the enlarged image data obtained by enlarging the second predetermined image data at the timing, it is possible to suppress the increase in the time required for the reading. On the other hand, by using the first predetermined image data after the timing, it is possible to read the first predetermined image data and improve the image quality of the predetermined image in a situation where there is enough time to read the image data. Becomes

Features G6. When the predetermined image is displayed using the first predetermined image data, the display control unit changes the display mode of the predetermined image by using the different first predetermined image data at a plurality of update timings, The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that when the predetermined image is displayed using the second predetermined image data, the display mode of the predetermined image is not changed.

According to the characteristic G6, when the predetermined image is displayed using the first predetermined image data, the display content of the predetermined image can be prevented from being uniformized by changing the display mode of the predetermined image. When the predetermined image is displayed using the second predetermined image data, it is possible to give priority to reduction of the processing load.

Features G7. A plurality of the first predetermined image data are provided so that the display mode of the predetermined image can be changed over a plurality of update timings, and only one second predetermined image data is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristic features G1 to G6.

According to the characteristic G7, while the plurality of the first predetermined image data are provided so that the display mode of the predetermined image can be changed, only the second predetermined image data is provided so that the second predetermined image data is provided. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration when a predetermined image is displayed using the predetermined image data.

For any one of the features G1 to G7, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P),
An image is displayed on the display unit using the generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and the content of the image is updated at the update timing. Display control means (VDP135),
Equipped with
A situation in which the data generation unit displays a plurality of individual images including the first specific individual image (loop effect A character CH8) and the second specific individual image (loop effect B character CH9) on the display unit. In, the execution of the information derivation process (interpolation display period process) is started in order to derive the first display information (coordinate data) necessary for changing the display mode of the first specific individual image, and the second specific information is displayed. A derivation process executing means for starting execution of the information derivation process in order to derive the second display information necessary for changing the display mode of the individual image (function of executing the interpolation display period process in the display CPU 131),
The derivation process executing means derives the predetermined display information, which is one of the first display information and the second display information, when the period from one update timing to the next update timing is a specific period. The execution of the information derivation process is started in a predetermined specific period, and the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information that is the other of the first display information and the second display information is performed in the predetermined specific period. A gaming machine, which is started in the specific period after the specific period.

According to the feature H1, in a situation where the display unit displays a plurality of individual images including the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is When changed, the derivation start of the first display information necessary for changing the display mode and the derivation start of the second display information are performed in different specific periods. As a result, compared to a configuration in which the derivation start of the first display information and the derivation start of the second display information are performed in the same specific period, an event that the processing load becomes extremely high in one specific period does not occur. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to suitably change the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, and it is possible to suitably perform the display control.

Features H2. The game according to the feature H1, wherein the derivation process execution means starts the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information in the next specific period with respect to the predetermined specific period. Machine.

According to the characteristic H2, while the deviation between the derivation start timing of the first display information and the derivation start timing of the second display information is minimized, an event occurs that the processing load becomes extremely high in one specific period. It becomes possible not to do it.

Features H3. The display control means, when the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the predetermined display information is started, even if the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information is not started, The game according to the feature H1 or H2, characterized by starting display using the predetermined display information on the side of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image that is to be used for the predetermined display information. Machine.

According to the feature H3, even if the derivation start timing of the first display information and the derivation start timing of the second display information are intentionally shifted, the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image It will be possible to start the changes of the above.

Features H4. The display control means causes the first specific individual image to display a first specific motion display (first loop performance mode of the looping A character CH8) followed by a first specific motion display (interpolation display of the looping A character CH8). Period mode), the second specific individual image is displayed following the second predetermined motion display (first loop performance mode of the B character CH9 for loop effect) and the second specific motion display (B character CH9 for loop effect). The contents of the image are updated so that
Features H1 to H3, wherein the first display information is information for performing the first specific motion display, and the second display information is information for performing the second specific motion display. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic H4, even if the start timing of the specific operation display of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is shifted by shifting the specific period for starting the derivation of each display information, the first specific individual image and Since each of the second specific individual images is configured to perform the specific motion display subsequent to the predetermined motion display, it is possible for the player to recognize that the content of the deviation is also a series of the content of the motion display. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the processing load while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Features H5. The operation mode of the first specific individual image and the operation mode of the second specific individual image at the timing of starting execution of the information derivation process for deriving the predetermined display information are different. A gaming machine according to feature H4.

According to the characteristic H5, even if the start timing of the specific operation display of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is shifted by shifting the specific period for starting the derivation of each display information, the information derivation process is executed. Since the operation mode of the first specific individual image and the operation mode of the second specific individual image at the start timing are different from each other, the difference in the operation modes makes the deviation of the start timing inconspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the processing load while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Features H6. The operation mode of the first specific individual image at the timing when the first predetermined operation display ends is a predetermined mode, and the operation mode of the second specific individual image at the timing when the second predetermined operation display ends is It is a predetermined mode,
The gaming machine according to feature H4 or H5, wherein the predetermined display information is the first display information and the specific display information is the second display information.

According to Feature H6, which of the first display information and the second display information is to be used to start the information derivation process is predetermined, so that the target for starting the information derivation process is changed depending on the situation. This simplifies the processing configuration in that there is no need to do so. In addition, since the operation mode of each specific individual image at the timing when the predetermined operation display ends is determined, it is previously determined from which of the first display information and the second display information the information derivation process is started. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the player who visually recognizes the display content from feeling uncomfortable.

Features H7. On the basis of occurrence of a switching trigger that occurs irregularly in a situation where the first specific individual image is displaying the first predetermined operation display and the second specific individual image is displaying the second predetermined operation display, The first specific motion display and the second specific motion display are started,
The derivation process execution means determines a target for starting the information derivation process first among the first display information and the second display information according to the timing at which the switching trigger has occurred. The game machine described in the characteristic H4 or H5, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the CPU 131.

According to the characteristic H7, since the trigger for switching from the situation in which the predetermined operation display is performed to the situation in which the specific operation display is performed occurs irregularly, it is possible to diversify the display content. In this case, which of the first display information and the second display information is to be used to start the information derivation process is determined in accordance with the timing at which the switching trigger has occurred, so that the player is identified in an order that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to start operation display.

Features H8. The data generating means,
Means for deriving information for causing the first specific individual image to display the first predetermined motion according to the first predetermined motion information (first animation data AD1 for A character) stored in advance (step in the display CPU 131). A function for executing the process of S2407),
According to the previously stored first special motion information (second animation data AD2 for A character), a first special motion display (second loop effect mode of the loop effect A character CH8) is performed on the first specific individual image. Means for deriving information for making the display CPU 131 function to execute the processing of step S2407 in the display CPU 131;
Means for deriving information for causing the second specific individual image to display the second predetermined motion according to the second predetermined motion information (first animation data AD3 for B character) stored in advance (step in the display CPU 131). A function for executing the process of S2407),
According to the second special motion information (second animation data AD4 for B character) stored in advance, a second special motion display (second loop effect mode of B character CH9 for loop effect) is performed on the second specific individual image. Means for deriving information for making the display CPU 131 function to execute the processing of step S2407 in the display CPU 131;
Equipped with
The first specific motion display is performed after the first predetermined motion display is performed and before the first special motion display is performed,
The second specific motion display is performed after the second predetermined motion display is performed and before the second special motion display is performed,
The derivation process execution means derives the first display information by executing the information derivation process using the first predetermined motion information and the first special motion information, and the second predetermined motion information and The gaming machine according to any one of features H4 to H7, wherein the second display information is derived by executing the information derivation process using the second special motion information.

According to the feature H8, by performing the specific motion display between each predetermined motion display and each special motion display based on the information derived by using the predetermined motion information and the special motion information stored in advance, It is possible to smoothly change the display content from the state in which the predetermined operation display is being performed to the state in which the special operation display is being performed while suppressing the amount of information required to store the information in advance. However, if the process of deriving the display information using the predetermined motion information and the special motion information is attempted collectively in one specific period, the processing load may become extremely large. With the above configuration, the derivation of the display information is started in different specific periods between the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, so that the processing load can be dispersed.

For any one of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P),
A display control unit (VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using the generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152);
Equipped with
The data generating means uses the color defining image data (background texture data GTD1) having a plurality of unit data associated with numerical information defining color information from the display storing means (memory module 133) for use. Is a configuration for generating the generated data by
The display storage means stores in advance adjustment data (first refraction texture data GTD2, second refraction texture data GTD3) having a plurality of the unit data as with the color regulation image data,
The data generating means uses the numerical information derived from the unit data of the adjustment data as the predetermined adjustment information different from the color information, so that the corresponding individual image displayed using the color defining image data is displayed. A game machine provided with a content adjusting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4103 to S4107 in the VDP 135) for adjusting the display content.

According to the characteristic I1, since the display content of the corresponding individual image is adjusted by using the predetermined adjustment information, it is possible to diversify the display content while using the same color regulation image data. In this case, the predetermined adjustment information is derived by using the adjustment data having a plurality of unit data as with the color regulation image data. This makes it possible to adjust the display content of the corresponding individual image by using the adjustment data stored in the display storage means as the same data as the color definition image data. It becomes possible to adjust the display content of the corresponding individual image while sharing the processing content for reading out the data and the processing content for temporarily storing after the reading, as compared with the configuration in which the adjustment data is prepared as different data. .. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature I2. The unit data has a plurality of base color correspondence data (R value, G value, B value) corresponding to the base color,
In the characteristic I1, the content adjusting means specifies the predetermined adjustment information by using numerical information derived from a plurality of base color correspondence data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic I2, it is possible to finely control the content of the predetermined adjustment information by deriving the predetermined adjustment information using the plurality of base color correspondence information set in the unit data of the adjustment data. ..

Feature I3. The unit data has a plurality of base color correspondence data (R value, G value, B value) corresponding to the base color,
The content adjusting means may specify the predetermined adjustment information by using numerical information derived from some of the plurality of base color correspondence data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. The gaming machine described in the characteristic I1 or I2.

According to the feature I3, all the base color corresponding data is used by deriving the predetermined adjustment information by using a part of the plurality of base color corresponding data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. As a result, the processing load for deriving the predetermined adjustment information can be reduced as compared with the configuration for deriving the predetermined adjustment information.

Feature I4. The data generating means,
Arranging means for arranging object data, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the process of step S2306 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane (executes the processing of steps S2310 to S2312 in the VDP 135). Function),
Have
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the color definition image data is texture data set for the object data.

According to the characteristic I4, it is possible to derive the predetermined adjustment information by using the adjustment data prepared as the texture data.

Feature I5. The game according to feature I4, characterized in that the content adjustment means adjusts the content of the unit data in the texture data, rather than adjusting the content of the object data by using the predetermined adjustment information. Machine.

According to the feature I5, the content of the unit data in the texture data is adjusted instead of adjusting the content of the object data by using the predetermined adjustment information. Therefore, the adjustment target is not the three-dimensional information but the two-dimensional information. The information can be used, and the processing load for making adjustments can be reduced.

Feature I6. The game machine according to feature I5, characterized in that the content adjusting means adjusts the content of the texture data by using the predetermined adjustment information in a state before being set in the object data.

According to the feature I6, since the adjustment using the predetermined adjustment information can be performed without being affected by the data state after the texture data is set to the object data, the adjustment can be easily performed.

Features I7. Any one of the characteristics I1 to I6 characterized in that the content adjusting means causes the corresponding individual image displayed by using the color defining image data to be distorted by using the predetermined adjustment information. The game machine described.

According to the feature I7, it is possible to perform the distortion display of the corresponding individual image by using the adjustment data stored in the display storage unit as the same data as the color regulation image data.

For any one of the features I1 to I7, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. Arrangement means for arranging object data, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP135) and viewpoint setting means (VDP135) for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. In step S2306) and projecting the object data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating generation data (drawing data) based on the data projected on the projection plane. Generated data storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing the generated data generated by the data generation means having the drawing setting means (function of executing the processing of step S2310 to step S2312 in the VDP 135),
Display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display means (symbol display device 41),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation means does not adjust the content of the object data (background plate-shaped object data GSD) based on the predetermined adjustment information, but the texture data (background texture data GTD1) set for the object data. Content adjusting means for adjusting the display content of the corresponding individual image displayed by using these object data and texture data by adjusting the content of the above based on the predetermined adjustment information (the processing of steps S4103 to S4107 in the VDP 135 is executed. A game machine characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the feature J1, the content of the unit data in the texture data is adjusted instead of adjusting the content of the object data by using the predetermined adjustment information. Therefore, the adjustment target is not the three-dimensional information but the two-dimensional information. The information can be used, and the processing load for making adjustments can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Features J2. The game machine according to feature J1, wherein the content adjusting means adjusts the content of the texture data by using the predetermined adjustment information in a state before being set in the object data.

According to the feature J2, since the adjustment using the predetermined adjustment information can be performed without being affected by the data state after the texture data is set to the object data, the adjustment can be easily performed.

For any one of the features J1 to J2, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The respective inventions of the characteristic group A to the characteristic group J can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. A first control means (sound-light side MPU 62) for determining execution contents of the effect;
Second control means (display CPU 72) for controlling the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) based on the transmission information transmitted by the first control means.
Equipped with
When a predetermined execution trigger is generated, the trigger execution effect (notice display) is executed in the effect execution means,
The trigger corresponding effect has a plurality of effect elements (contents of the second type) in which the change target content that is at least one of the presence or absence of execution and the content changes.
It is a configuration in which the execution pattern of the trigger corresponding effect is different depending on the combination pattern of the content of the variation target for the plurality of effect elements,
The first control means, when transmitting the transmission information for executing the trigger corresponding effect, the corresponding transmission information (first command data CD1, second command data CD2) corresponding to the change target content of a predetermined effect element. , Third command data CD3) and corresponding transmission information (first command data CD1, second command data CD2, third command data CD3) corresponding to the variation target contents of other effect elements, and information to be transmitted separately. A game machine having a transmission means (a function of executing a command selection process in the sound-light side MPU 62).

According to the characteristic K1, since the execution pattern of the trigger corresponding effect differs depending on the combination pattern of the variation target contents of the plurality of effect elements, it is possible to diversify the effect contents of the trigger corresponding effect. In this case, the first correspondence transmission information corresponding to the change target contents of the predetermined effect element and the second correspondence transmission information corresponding to the change target contents of the other effect elements are transmitted separately. Even when the number of effect elements is increased or decreased, or when the content to be changed is changed, the corresponding transmission information may be changed in units of the corresponding effect elements, which facilitates the design of the transmission information. ..

Features K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein each of the predetermined effect element and the other effect element determines effect contents to be simultaneously executed.

According to the characteristic K2, even in the case of a plurality of effect elements that determine effect contents to be executed at the same time, the corresponding transmission information for causing the second control means to specify the change target content of the effect elements is for each kind of effect element. Since the information is transmitted to the user, the transmission information can be easily designed.

Features K3. The first control unit transmits end transmission information (end command) indicating that all of the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the trigger corresponding effect has been transmitted (end step S509 in the sound-light side MPU 62). The game machine according to the feature K1 or K2, which is provided with a function of executing the process of.

According to the characteristic K3, the end transmission information is transmitted when all of the correspondence transmission information necessary for executing the trigger corresponding production is transmitted in the configuration in which the correspondence transmission information is transmitted in units of effect elements. It is possible to make the second control unit recognize that the transmission of all the correspondence transmission information necessary for executing the opportunity corresponding effect has been completed without fixing the number of effect elements included in the opportunity corresponding effect. Become.

Features K4. The second control means
Storage execution means (a function of executing command interrupt processing in the display CPU 72) for storing the received corresponding transmission information in the information storage means (command storage buffer 101);
Reference information for setting reference information (execution target table) used to execute the trigger corresponding effect corresponding to the plurality of corresponding transmission information stored in the information storage unit when the end transmission information is received Setting means (a function for executing command corresponding processing in the display CPU 72),
The gaming machine described in the feature K3, which is provided with.

According to the characteristic K4, the second control means is configured to set the reference information used for executing the trigger corresponding effect after receiving all the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the trigger corresponding effect. Instead of setting the reference information corresponding to each variation target content of the effect element, it is possible to set one reference information corresponding to all the variation target content of all effect elements.

Features K5. The corresponding transmission information includes general outline information (first command data CD1) for specifying the outline contents of the effect element corresponding to the corresponding transmission information, and branch contents included in the outline contents corresponding to the outline information. The branch information (second command data CD2, third command data CD3) for specifying which one of them is to be executed, and the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4.

According to the characteristic K5, even one piece of corresponding transmission information is divided into the outline information and the branch information, so that the design of one piece of corresponding transmission information can be facilitated.

Features K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the second control means grasps different contents from the branch information depending on the contents of the outline information even if the contents of the same branch information are the same.

According to the characteristic K6, since the branch information is commonly used among the plurality of corresponding transmission information, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for storing the transmission corresponding information in advance.

Note that, for any one of the features K1 to K6, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the characteristic group K can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a command transmitted from one control means is used to execute control corresponding to the command by another control means.

For example, in a pachinko machine, a configuration in which execution control of production is performed by the control means for production based on a command transmitted from the main control means for controlling the progress of the game, or transmitted from the control means for one production A configuration is known in which execution control of performance is performed by another control means for performance based on the command.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to optimize the configuration of the transmission information transmitted from one control means to another control means in order to execute the effect, and this point has not yet been achieved. There is room for improvement.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. An arithmetic execution unit (a function for executing task processing in the display CPU 72) that starts arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information (execution target table) when a start trigger occurs;
A result utilization unit (a function of executing the process of step S609 in the display CPU 72, the VDP 76) for executing a specific process using the calculation result of the arithmetic process;
Equipped with
When the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing in a predetermined execution time and the arithmetic processing is ended in the middle, the arithmetic execution means performs the predetermined operation in the next execution time with respect to the predetermined execution time. Re-execution means (function of executing the processing of step S606, step S610, and step S916 in the display CPU 72) for executing the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information set as the usage target in the execution time A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature L1, when the termination condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing, the arithmetic processing is terminated midway, so that the processing time of the arithmetic processing changes and execution of other processing is greatly restricted. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event of being done. In addition, when the arithmetic processing is terminated halfway, in the arithmetic processing of the next execution time, the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information targeted for use in the arithmetic processing terminated midway is executed again. This makes it possible to complete the execution of the arithmetic processing using each piece of arithmetic information, even if the arithmetic processing may be terminated midway.

Feature L2. The game according to the feature L1, wherein the re-execution unit restarts the arithmetic processing from the content that has been completed in the predetermined execution time in the next execution time after the predetermined execution time. Machine.

According to the feature L2, when the calculation process using the calculation information that has been used in the previous execution time is executed again, the calculation process is restarted from the content that was completed in the previous execution time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time required to complete the arithmetic processing restarted in a new execution time.

Feature L3. The arithmetic processing includes a plurality of types of individual arithmetic processing (step S902, step S903, step S906, step S909, step S912 to step S914), and the plurality of types of individual arithmetic processing are sequentially executed at each execution time of the arithmetic processing. The target configuration,
The gaming machine according to feature L2, characterized in that the computation executing means terminates the current computation processing after the termination of the individual computation processing, even if the termination condition is satisfied during execution of the individual computation processing. ..

According to the feature L3, even if the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, it is not terminated in the middle of the individual arithmetic processing. Therefore, the information setting process for restarting the arithmetic processing is complicated. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature L4. The arithmetic processing is executed as a part of the regular processing (V interrupt processing) in which the execution condition is regularly satisfied,
The game according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the operation executing means ends the operation processing on the way when the execution condition is satisfied as the end condition during the operation processing. Machine.

According to the feature L4, it is possible to complete the execution of the arithmetic processing using each arithmetic information while ensuring the regular execution of the periodic processing.

Feature L5. Even if the arithmetic processing is terminated halfway in the predetermined number of executions, the arithmetic execution means determines whether or not a predetermined event (set of execution target table for notification) has occurred. In the next execution time with respect to the execution time, the operation using the operation information corresponding to the priority event instead of using the operation information set as the usage target in the predetermined execution time The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, which is characterized by executing a process.

According to the feature L5, the execution of the arithmetic process using the arithmetic information corresponding to the priority event is prioritized over the resumption of the arithmetic process using the arithmetic information in the arithmetic process that is terminated midway. It is possible to obtain the excellent effects as already described while not delaying the execution of the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information corresponding to.

Feature L6. The specific control means having the arithmetic execution means transmits the re-execution correspondence information (delayed command) when the re-execution means is set to re-execute the arithmetic processing. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S611 in the CPU 72.

According to the feature L6, the re-execution correspondence information is transmitted when the arithmetic processing in a predetermined execution time is terminated halfway and the arithmetic processing is executed again in the next execution time, so the specific control means It is possible to make the operation other than the above correspond to the re-execution of the arithmetic processing.

Feature L7. In addition to the specific control means, a predetermined control means (sound-light side MPU 62) is provided,
The predetermined control means is provided with processing adjustment means (a function of executing display side command corresponding processing in the sound-light side MPU 62) for adjusting the execution content of the predetermined processing when the re-execution correspondence information is received. The gaming machine according to feature L6.

According to the feature L7, when the arithmetic processing is re-executed, the execution content of the predetermined processing in the predetermined control means is adjusted, so that the processing content of the specific processing and the processing content of the predetermined processing can be associated with each other. Becomes

Feature L8. As a result of the specific processing, the result utilizing means uses the calculation result of the arithmetic processing to perform execution control of the effect in the specific effect executing means (symbol display device 41),
The gaming machine according to Feature L7, wherein the predetermined control unit controls, as the predetermined process, execution execution of a predetermined effect execution unit (display light emitting unit 44, speaker unit 45).

According to the feature L8, when the derivation of the calculation result is delayed in the calculation process executed to perform the execution control of the effect in the specific effect execution means, the execution is performed to perform the execution control of the effect in the predetermined effect execution means. Since the processing content of the predetermined processing performed is also adjusted, it becomes possible to mutually correspond the content of the effect in each effect execution means.

Feature L9. When the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing in the predetermined execution times and the arithmetic processing is ended midway in the predetermined execution times, the result utilization means performs the calculation in the execution times before the predetermined execution times. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, characterized in that the specific process is executed by utilizing a calculation result of the process.

According to the feature L9, when the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, the specific processing is not executed by using the contents in the middle of the arithmetic processing, but the arithmetic result of the arithmetic processing completed before that. Since the specific process is executed by using, it is possible to prevent the execution content of the specific process from becoming an abnormal content.

For any one of the features L1 to L9, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Any of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the characteristic L group can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a CPU and also have a control means in which an element such as a memory storing a control program is mounted, and the game is executed by executing arithmetic processing in the control means. Controls are being made to enable this. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted in the control unit, but are mounted in the control unit in an integrated state.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably executing the arithmetic processing in the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine which gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped patterns.

10... Pachinko machine, 41... Symbol display device, 44... Display light emitting part, 45... Speaker part, 62... Sound light side MPU, 72... Display CPU, 74... Memory module, 76... VDP, 81... Development buffer, 82 ... frame buffer, 93... moving picture decoder, 101... command storage buffer, 121... unit area, 122... pixel, 131... display CPU, 133... memory module, 135... VDP, 142... frame buffer, 151... geometry operation unit, 152 ... Rendering unit, 169... Coordinate calculation area, ABD1 to ABD50... Bone data, AD1 to AD4... Animation data, BF1... Drawing buffer, BF2 to BF5... Saving buffer, BG... Ground image, BGD... Ground object data , BMD... Base moving image data, BOD1 to BOD50... Bone data, BSD... Plane shadow plate object data, BST1... First plane shadow texture data, BST2... Second plane shadow texture data, BTD1... Texture data, BTD2 ... Set texture data, CD1 to CD3... Command data, CH1... Color change effect character, CH2... Effect effect character, CH8... Loop effect A character, CH9... Loop effect B character, CH10... Bone display character , CH11... Production character, CH12... Shadow image, CH13... Production character, CH14... Shadow image, CH15... Production character, CH16-CH18... Design display part, CHG1-CHG5... Set unit character, CR... Color change target Area, ED5... Normal effect image data, ED6... Simple effect image data, EG2... Effect image, EG6... Increasing effect image, FRD1... Skeleton data, FRD2... Collective skeleton data, GSD... Background plate object Data, GTD1... Background texture data, GTD2, GTD3... Refraction texture data, P... Display surface, PD1-PD3... Parts image data, SG... Stair image, SGD... Stair object data, SKD1... Skin data, SKD2... Skin data for aggregation, SSD... Plate-shaped object data for step shadows.

Claims (1)

First control means for deciding the execution content of the effect,
Second control means for controlling the effect execution means based on the transmission information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
When the predetermined execution trigger has occurred, the performance corresponding to the trigger is executed in the effect executing means,
The trigger corresponding effect has a plurality of effect elements in which the change target content that is at least one of the presence or absence of execution and the content changes,
It is a configuration in which the execution pattern of the trigger corresponding effect is different depending on the combination pattern of the content of the variation target for the plurality of effect elements,
The first control means, when transmitting the transmission information for executing the trigger corresponding effect, displays the corresponding transmission information corresponding to the change target content of a predetermined effect element and the change target content of another effect element. A gaming machine, characterized by comprising information transmitting means for distinguishing and transmitting corresponding corresponding transmission information.

Images